UnitedStates
CollegiateSki&Snowboard
Association
2016/2017
CompetitionandRules
Manual
EffectiveJanuary12,2017
1
2016-2017CompetitionandRulesManual–ApprovedJanuary12,2017
2016.v.1.4
TheUnitedStatesCollegiateSki&SnowboardAssociation
USCSANationalOffice
320StageRoad,POBox180
Cummington,MA01026
1-877-35-USCSA
www.USCSA.com
This publication incorporates the final legislative actions of the annual USCSA Board of
DirectorsMeeting,June9-11,2016.LegislationapprovedbytheUSCSABoardofDirectors
attheannualmeetingorduringanExecutiveBoardsessionissetoffbyagraybackground.
Readers seeking the legislative history of a given provision (earlier dates of adoption or
revision) should consult the USCSA Academic Affairs Committee or the USCSA Executive
Director.
Distributed to: directors of athletics; faculty athletics representatives; presidents or
chancellors;conferencecommissioners;seniorcomplianceadministrators;andprovisional
andaffiliatedmembers.
The 2016/2017 Competition and Rules Manual marks a complete formatting overhaul of
thepreviouseditionsoftheUSCSACompetitionandRulesManual,approvedbytheUSCSA
Board of Directors and drafted by the Academic Affairs Committee Chair, under the
guidance of the USCSA Executive Board and the Vice Presidents of Alpine, Nordic and
Snowboard/Freeski. This edition of the USCSA Competition and Rules Manual was
approvedduringtheExecutiveBoardSessiononSeptember1,2016.
USCSA, USCSA logo and United States Collegiate National Championships are registered
marks of the Association, and use in any manner is prohibited unless prior approval is
obtainedfromtheAssociation.
©2016bytheUnitedStatesCollegiateSki&SnowboardAssociation.
2
2016-2017CompetitionandRulesManual–ApprovedJanuary12,2017
2016.v.1.4
TABLEOFCONTENTS
1.0SECTION1–INTRODUCTIONANDDIRECTORY
1.1.USCSAMissionStatement
1.2.OrganizationalProfile
1.3.TheFormulaForSuccess
1.4.TheHeartbeatoftheUSCSA
1.5.ConferenceCoordinatorsandDivisionalStaff
9
9
9
9
10
12
2.0SECTION2–TEAMANDINDIVIDUALELIGIBILITY
13
3.0SECTION3–ALPINERULES
23
23
23
24
24
26
26
2.1.USCSAMembership
13
2.2.EnforcementofUSCSAGeneralEligibilityRules
15
2.3.GeneralPoliciesforMemberSchools
15
2.4.EligibilityRequirementsforRegionalandNationalChampionships
17
2.5.ProceduralRegulationsforSubmittingUSCSATeamandIndividualRegistrationand
EligibilityForms
19
2.6.ProtestsandAppealsConcerningEligibility
21
2.7.ReferencedNCAADivisionIIRules
21
3.1.FISAndUSSARulesversusUSCSARules
3.2.ProtestsConcerningAlpineEvents
3.3.EquipmentRulesSpecifictoUSCSA
3.4.JointRegulationsforSlalom,GiantSlalom
3.5.USSARaceEventRegistration
3.6.AlpineSkiingParallelEvent
4.0SECTION4–NORDICRULES
4.1.FISandUSSArulesversusUSCSArules
4.2.TheNordicEvent
4.3.ProtestsConcerningNordicEvents
4.4.SeedingofNordicChampionshipCompetitorsforNationalEvents
5.0SECTION5–SNOWBOARDRULES
5.1.USASA,USSAandFISRulesvs.USCSARules
5.2.TheStart
5.3.TheFinish
5.4.Results
5.5.JointRegulationsoftheCourse
5.6.ProtestsConcerningSnowboardEvents
5.7.CancellationofACompetition
5.8.GiantSlalom(GS)
5.9.SnowboardCross(SBX)
5.10.JointRegulationsForGiantSlalom,SnowboardCross
5.11.RulesSpecifictoParallelEvents
5.12.RulesSpecifictoHalfpipe
5.13.RulesSpecifictoSlopestyle
5.14.CausesForDisqualification
5.15.OrganizingCommitteeandItsDuties
5.16.CompetitionCommittee,CompetitionOfficialsandTheirDuties
5.17.CompositionAndDutiesOfTheCompetitionJury
3
33
33
33
35
35
37
37
37
38
39
41
42
44
44
46
51
54
58
62
65
66
66
69
2016-2017CompetitionandRulesManual–ApprovedJanuary12,2017
2016.v.1.4
6.0SECTION6–FREESKIRULES
6.1.USASA,USSAandFISRulesvs.USCSARules
6.2.TheStart
6.3.TheFinish
6.4.Results
6.5.JointRegulationsoftheCourse
6.6.ProtestsConcerningFreeskiEvents
6.7.CancellationOfACompetition
6.8.JointRegulations
6.9.RulesSpecificToSkiercross(Skx)
6.10.RulesSpecificToHalfpipe
6.11.RulesSpecifictoSlopestyle
6.12.CausesForDisqualification
6.13.OrganizingCommitteeAndItsDuties
6.14.CompetitionCommittee,CompetitionOfficialsAndTheirDuties
6.15.CompositionandDutiesoftheCompetitionJury
7.0SECTION7–SCORINGRULES
7.1.FourEventScoring
7.2.NordicScoring
7.3.AlpineScoring
7.4.SnowboardScoring
7.5.FreeskiScoring
7.6.USCSAAll-AmericanSkiTeam
7.7.USCSAScholasticAthleteRecognition
7.8.USCSAHolgerPetersenVolunteerAward
7.9.ArmedServicesAward
8.0Section8–NationalChampionshipsQualifications
8.1.RegionalQualificationProcessTowardsAttendanceAtNationals
8.2.RegionalTeamAllocationToTheAnnualUscsaNationalChampionship
8.3.NationalChampionshipEvents
8.4.NationalChampionshipHostingAndSiteSelectionProcess
8.5.NationalChampionshipSchedule
74
74
74
75
76
78
79
81
81
83
88
93
95
96
97
100
105
105
106
106
107
108
109
110
110
111
113
113
114
119
121
122
9.0SECTION9-ARTICLESOFINCORPORATION
125
10.0SECTION10-BY-LAWSOFTHEUNITEDSTATESCOLLEGIATESKI&
SNOWBOARDASSOCIATION,INC.
127
4
2016-2017CompetitionandRulesManual–ApprovedJanuary12,2017
2016.v.1.4
USER’SGUIDE
QuickreferencetothedifferentaspectsoftheUSCSACompetitionandRulesManual.
SectionHeader
The beginning of each section is
denoted by the section header.
The PDF version of this manual
will link the table of contents to
eachsectionheading.
DecimalNumberingwith
TopicHeadings
The decimal numbering system
provides efficiency and flexibility.
Section headings and numbering
to at least the fourth subsection
assist the user in quickly
referencing the specific rules and
regulations. The numbering
system uses indentation format,
whichhelpsthereaderrelateeach
subsectiontothebasicsection.
PageNumber
Eachpageofthemanualhasbeen
numberedforeaseofreferenceto
page, as well as decimal
numbering system. The PDF
version of this manual links the
table of contents to each section
andsubsectionbypagenumber.
RuleChanges
Any change to a rule will be
referenced by a shaded grey
backgroundwiththeprevioustext
struck through. This same
informationwouldbecapturedin
the “Change Log” starting on the
followingpage.
Forexample:
5.11.5.7 During Finals riders are
allowedaminimumof10minutes
minimum of 5 minutes to inspect
the parallel courses by sliding
downoncefromtoptobottomon
thesides.
5
PublicationDateandRevision
The footer of the manual references the annual edition, competition
season and the date in which the manual was approved by the Board of
Directors of the USCSA. The second line of the footer illustrates the
current version and any changes that have taken place to the manual
duringtheseasonwillbereferencedonthe“ChangeLog”startingonthe
nextpageofthismanual.
2016-2017CompetitionandRulesManual–ApprovedJanuary12,2017
2016.v.1.4
CHANGELOG–USCSARULES2016-2017
2016.v.1.1–ChangesApprovedbytheExecutiveBoardon9/1/2016.
1. ConferenceNameChangeforSouthernCalifornia
TheExecutiveBoardapprovedthenamechangefortheSouthernCaliforniaConference
from Southern California to the Southwest Conference, capturing the growing
geographicareasofsouthernNevada,ArizonaandNewMexico.Thischangeimpacted
sections1.5,8.2.2.1and10.8.1.2.
2016.v.1.2–ChangesApprovedbytheExecutiveBoardon10/6/2016.
1. RemovalofNordicRule4.2.3.
The Executive Board approved the removal of Nordic Rule 4.2.3 regarding height
differences,maximumclimbandtotalclimbssincewedonothavethe8.5kmdistance
andwedonotdifferentiatebygender.WefollowUSSArulesonracesandthissection
isintheUSSArulebookwiththeappropriatedistances.
2016.v.1.3–ChangesApprovedbytheExecutiveBoardon10/13/2016.
TheExecutiveBoardapprovedthecreationofanewsection3.3regardingEquipment
RulesforAlpineCompetition.Section3.1.1wasrevisedasperbelowwiththeaddition
of the grey highlighted text, along with the creation of a new section 3.3, shifting the
existingsectionseachdownto3.4,3.5and3.6.
6
1. Revision to Alpine Rules Section 3.1.1.USCSA alpine competitions shall be
governed by the most current edition of the following rule books; USCSA Alpine
Rules,USSAAlpineCompetitionRulespertainingtoscoredU19andSr.events.(Not
USSAMastersrules,unlessspecificallyreferencedwithintheUSCSArules)andthe
FIS (ICR). USCSA alpine competitions shall be governed first by the USCSA rules,
second,inallareasnotspecificallycovered,theUSSAAlpineCompetitionrulesshall
beused,andthird,inallareasnotspecificallycoveredtheFIS(ICR)shallbeused.In
nocaseshallaUSCSArulebeenforcedthatviolatesaUSSArule.FISandUSSArule
booksareavailable,onlineatwww.ussa.organdwww.fis-ski.com.
2. CreationofnewAlpineSection3.3EquipmentRulesSpecifictoUSCSA
2016-2017CompetitionandRulesManual–ApprovedJanuary12,2017
2016.v.1.4
3. Creation of new Alpine Sub-Section 3.3.1. TheUSCSA adheres to all USSA
Equipment rules for competitions as defined in the USSA Alpine Rules
(http://alpine.usskiteam.com/alpine-programs/athletes/rules). In any areas not
specificallycoveredbytheUSSA,thentheFIS(ICR)rulesshallbeused.
4. Creation of new Alpine Sub-Section 3.3.2. For the 2016-2017 season only,
theUSCSAwillfollowtheUSSAMaster'srulesasdefinedintheUSSAAlpineEquipment
GuidewithregardtoonlyGiantSlalomskiturnradiusrequirements.
2016.v.1.4–AnnualUpdatetoRegionalBerthsCalculations
1. UpdatedPopulationandPerformanceBerthsfor2016/2017Season
7
PerNationalChampionshipsQualificationsRule8.2.3,theAlpineQuotastotheUSCSA
National Championship are determined annually. Membership Berths are calculated
after January 1st of each competition season, based on the number of membership
applicationsrecordedascompleteonJanuary1st.Nochangestookplacethisyearin
thenumberofberthseachUSCSARegionisawarded.
2016-2017CompetitionandRulesManual–ApprovedJanuary12,2017
2016.v.1.4
CORPORATESPONSORS
ReliableRacingSupply
ProvidingdiscountsonracesuppliestotheUSCSA&itsmembersandsuppliesequipment
fortheNationalChampionships.www.reliableracing.com
CORPORATESUPPLIERS
Patagonia
TwitchellSportswear
8
2016-2017CompetitionandRulesManual–ApprovedJanuary12,2017
2016.v.1.4
1.0 SECTION1–INTRODUCTIONANDDIRECTORY
1.1. USCSAMissionStatement
1.1.1. TobetheNationalgoverningbodyofteamski&snowboardcompetitionat
thecollegiatelevel.
1.1.2. To promote and increase awareness of and participation in alpine skiing,
nordicskiing,freeskiingandsnowboardingintheUnitedStates.
1.1.3. Toprovidecompetitionanddevelopmentopportunitiesforstudent/athletes
inateamatmosphereleadingtowardNationaltitlesineachdiscipline.
1.2. OrganizationalProfile
The United States Collegiate Ski & Snowboard Association (USCSA) is the sports
federationforcollegiateteamskiracingandsnowboardinginAmerica.Inexcessof178
collegesfromcoasttocoast,fieldsome4,700menandwomen,Alpine,Nordic,Freeski
andSnowboardathletesinover200raceeventsannually.
Competitiontakesplaceacrossthreeprogressivetiers.Conferencequalifiersdetermine
theparticipantsatthesixUSCSARegionalChampionships.TheRegionalChampionships
arethelaststepontheroadtotheannualUnitedStatesCollegiateSkiandSnowboard
Collegiate National Championships, the showcase event in college racing. The USCSA
CollegiateNationalChampionshipshasover500athletesparticipatefromuniversities
in19statesandfromallthe11conferencesoftheUSCSA.
Organizedaspartofanon-profit501(C)3EducationalFoundation,theUSCSAbelieves
that student/athletes, of all levels and abilities should have access to a quality and
exciting venue of ski & snowboard competition. The USCSA fosters parity, both of
representationandultimatelycompetition,tocreateandmaintainalevelplayingfield
anddoesallitcantoraisethelevelofcompetitionthroughoutalltheirprogramsfrom
the bottom up. The USCSA also recognizes that for athletes to be truly successful
individuals,academicsshouldtakepriorityoverski&snowboardcompetition.Tohelp
foster this, the USCSA stresses education first and offers a variety of academic based
awards.
1.3. TheFormulaForSuccess
TheUSCSAhasgrownandthrivedduetoitsuniqueapproach.Itistheonlycollegiate
level national governing sports body to foster competition among institutions with
9
2016-2017CompetitionandRulesManual–ApprovedJanuary12,2017
2016.v.1.4
varying national sports affiliations. This means that schools who are NCAA, NAIA,
NJCAA,orotherindependentsportbodiescanallparticipateintheUSCSA.
Another special feature of the USCSA is that teams can have different institutional
status. Teams organized as club sports and varsity sports compete on the same level
againstoneanother,makingtheUSCSAtheplaceforeveryone!
Team performance is emphasized within the USCSA, a departure from the typical
individualorWorldCupscoringformatinskiing.Teamsfieldfiveracerswiththetop
threeperformancesbeingusedfortheteamscore.FormerUSCSAathletesexpressthat
the USCSA's team orientation has been the seed for developing and nurturing a team
approachinotheraspectsoftheirlivesandcareers.
Overall team performance is considered separately for each discipline. A school can
field any single or combination of a men's alpine, women's alpine, men's nordic,
women's nordic, men’s freeski, women’s freeski, men’s snowboard, women’s
snowboardcompetitionteam.
The USCSA follows stringent rules of individual eligibility. This assures equitable
standardsforallstudent/athletes.
1.4. TheHeartbeatoftheUSCSA
1.4.1. VolunteerStaff.WiththeexceptionofourNationalOfficestaff,theUSCSAis
operatedentirelythroughthetirelesseffortsofitsdedicatedcoreofvolunteer
staff. These volunteers represent the heartbeat of the USCSA, and are
responsibleforcoordinatingandoperatingallUSCSAcompetitionevents.The
USCSA extends a big ‘Thank You’ to all of these individuals who donate their
timetomaketheorganizationasuccess.
1.4.2. Membership Representation. The USCSA is a member based organization,
meaningthatitsmembersplayanintegralroleinthedirectionandactionsof
the organization. Each member conference elects a delegate to the Board of
Directors.TheBoardalsoselectssixStudent/AthleteRepresentativestoserve
on the Board of Directors, making sure that the varying needs of USCSA
conferencesanddifferenttypesofteamsareaddressedandmet.AllUSCSAski
&snowboardteamsareencouragedtotakeanactiverolewithinthedecision
makingoftheUSCSA.
1.4.3. Membership Benefits. Competitor licensing and Eligibility monitoring,
website links for your team, Newsletter, discounts available with USCSA
Corporate Suppliers and Corporate Sponsors. Organizational assistance to
teams and conferences, Access to a Regional and National Championships,
10
2016-2017CompetitionandRulesManual–ApprovedJanuary12,2017
2016.v.1.4
Rules and Regulation authority, Team and Conference representation at the
USCSABoardofDirectorsannualmeeting.
1.4.4. Annual Board of Directors Meeting. The USCSA Board Meeting shall rotate
between the East, West and the Midwest starting with the Midwest in 1996.
TheUSCSABoardmeetingshallbeginthesecondFridayinJune.
11
•
2017Midwest
•
2018East
•
2019West
2016-2017CompetitionandRulesManual–ApprovedJanuary12,2017
2016.v.1.4
1.5. ConferenceCoordinatorsandDivisionalStaff
AlleghenyConference
SaraGieger
EasternConference
BoBigelow
MacConnellDivision
MikeLeblanc
ThompsonDivision
LauraSullivan
McBrienDivision
BolanBigelow
ReynoldsDivision
ScottHoisington
NordicDivision
AlyssaDausman
GrandTetonConference
JerryWolf
MideastConference
JimLongo
NordicDivision
AlyssaDausman
MidwestConference
RobinDzubay
ChicagoDivision
KevinHoulihan
LakeSuperiorDivision
MikeDzubay
MichiganDivision
OhioDivision
KevinDarago
NordicDivision
AtlanticHighlandsConference
ChrisShumeyko
NorthernCaliforniaConference
BrankoZagar
NorthwestConference
RonBonneau
RockyMountainConference
NickLabue
NordicDivision
ChristiBoggs
SoutheasternConference
SouthwestConference
12
DougGrayson
MollyNovasel
2016-2017CompetitionandRulesManual–ApprovedJanuary12,2017
2016.v.1.4
2.0 SECTION2–TEAMANDINDIVIDUALELIGIBILITY
2.1. USCSAMembership
2.1.1. An institution must be an active member of an affiliated USCSA ski &
snowboard conference. To participate in any USCSA conference, regional or
nationalchampionshipevent,theinstitutionorindividualmustbeamemberin
good standing of the USCSA national organization. All rules, regulations and
policiesofthenationalorganizationmustbeadheredtobyteamsvyingforthe
opportunitytoraceinsuchchampionshipevents.
2.1.1.1.
TeamRegistrationFees
$150.00InstitutionalFee
$150.00perDisciplineFee
TeamFeesincreaseby3%annually.
2.1.1.2.
LateFees
$50.00perInstitutionlatefeeaftertheTuesdaypriortoThanksgiving
daydeadline
$150.00afterDecember15
$200.00afterJanuary1
$400.00afterFebruary1
$800.00atUSCSANationalsSanctionsafterUSCSANationals
2.1.1.3.
TeamFeesforIndividualswithoutaTeam
1competitor-$75
2competitors-$125
3ormorecompetitors(constituteateam):FullTeamRegistrationFee
PerAboveSection2.1.1.1.
2.1.1.4. Men’s alpine, women’s alpine, men’s nordic, women’s nordic, men's
snowboard, women's snowboard, men’s freeski, women’s freeski, men’s
jumping,andwomen’sjumpingareeachconsideredaseparatediscipline.
13
2016-2017CompetitionandRulesManual–ApprovedJanuary12,2017
2016.v.1.4
2.1.2. TheUSCSAshallnotgrantmembershiptoaSecondaryorDevelopmentteam
ofanyinstitutionthatfieldseitheraUSCSAorNCAAcluborvarsityteam.(This
istoincludeanyteamsthathadbeenunderagrand-fatheredclause.)
O.I.:Membershipisnottobegrantedtomorethanoneteamataninstitution.If
a school has already joined the NCAA, then that is the team of record, and no
additional squad can be recognized from that school. Similarly if a school
registers a team with USCSA, no additional squad may be registered with the
USCSA. Only schools with a multiple campus setup may register more than one
squad.ThisisonlypossibleifALLoftheirathleticteamscompeteindependently.
(UCBerkeley,UCLosAngeles,UCSanDiego,etc.)
2.1.2.1. Secondary or Development Teams. These include any additional
squadataninstitutionformedtoproducemultiplelevelsofcompetitionat
that institution. Specifically, but not limited to Schools which field NCAA
VarsityteamsandwanttoregisteradditionalsquadstocompeteinUSCSA.
This is to include NAIA, Independent, and USCSA members wishing to
registera"secondsquad"withintheUSCSAorganization.
2.1.2.2. While we do not accept membership from Secondary teams, and
therefore they are not eligible for the championships, they may exist as
"guest"membersofconferencesandcompeteattheconferencelevel.
2.1.2.3. Per the approval of the Board of Directors the following exceptions
havebeen“grand-fathered’toRegional’s.
2.1.2.3.1.
Grand-fathered: University of Colorado, University of Denver
and Montana State University will from this time on, be the only
secondary schools that will be permitted this accommodation. The
WesternRegionisdirectedtoadjustthefieldsizeupto19teamsto
accommodateuptothreeguest/secondaryteams(CU,DU,MSU)who
finishintheRockyMountainConferenceinthetopfive(5)andinthe
Grand Teton Conference in the top three (3) to participate at the
regional’sasguestteams.
O.I.:Eachoftheaforementionedprograms(3)maysendupto5individuals
pergender,ifsoqualifiedasperelsewhere,totheAlpineEvents.Theywillbe
listed as "individuals" from those programs and seeded, 3 after the USCSA
memberindividualsrunningattheendofseedone,withtheremainingracer
allocated 3 at a time following each of the remaining four "team" seeds.
They will appear on all results as individuals in the same manner as other
individualsattheseraces,andasthereisnomentionofteamscorefromthe
USCSAindividuals,neithershalltherebementionofteamscorefromthese
"GUEST INDIVIDUALS". Additionally, as these racers are not members of
USCSA,butinvitedguests,theymaynotadvancetoNationals.
14
2016-2017CompetitionandRulesManual–ApprovedJanuary12,2017
2016.v.1.4
2.2. EnforcementofUSCSAGeneralEligibilityRules
2.2.1. The Academic Affairs Committee is a Permanent Standing Committee,
consisting of a chairperson and three members, independent of the
CompetitionCommittees.
2.2.2. TheAcademicAffairsCommitteeoftheUSCSAwillinvestigateandenforceall
governingrulespertainingtotheUSCSACompetitionDivisions.TheAcademic
AffairsCommitteeisempoweredbytheBODtoimposeandenforcesanctions
applicabletoviolations.
2.2.3. All member institutions must provide any documentation requested by the
USCSAAcademicAffairsCommittee.
2.2.4. Memberschoolsmustmonitortheirathletes'eligibility.
2.3. GeneralPoliciesforMemberSchools
2.3.1. DefinitionsApplicabletoEligibilityRegulations
2.3.1.1. REGULARLICENSE.AllcurrentUSCSArulesandreferencedrulesfrom
theNCAADivisionIIRuleBookadoptedbytheBODandallformsmustbe
maintained. Competitors registered in this manner shall be eligible to
compete in ALL USCSA races, including post season Regionals and
Nationals.
2.3.1.2. RESTRICTED LICENSE. Athletes on teams so registered shall be
eligible to compete only in conference races. Regional and National
competitionsareprohibited.
2.3.1.3. SEASON. A season commences with the beginning of practice
following team tryouts and ends with the final regularly scheduled ski &
snowboard meet prior to any post-season competition to begin the
process of qualifying for the United States Collegiate Skiing and
SnowboardChampionships.
NOTE: Regularly scheduled ski & snowboard meets may be held after the
conference/regionalqualifyingprocess.Theseski&snowboardmeetswillbe
countedforinjuryexemption.
2.3.1.4. Ski&SnowboardMeet.Aski&snowboardmeetisacompetitionheld
at a ski area regardless of the number of events (slalom, giant slalom,
boardercross,half-pipeand/ornordic).
2.3.1.5. Scrimmage. A scrimmage is a competition between two teams who
agreeitisnotanofficialski&snowboardrace.Ascrimmage:(1)isnota
ski&snowboardmeet,(2)doesnotcountonateam'swin-lossrecord,(3)
doesnotcounttowardsparticipationinamajorityoftheski&snowboard
15
2016-2017CompetitionandRulesManual–ApprovedJanuary12,2017
2016.v.1.4
meets,(4)shallnotbeusedindeterminingeligibilityinthecaseofinjury,
and(5)doesnothavepublishedresults.
2.3.1.6. AcompetitormustappearontheRegularorRestrictedLicenseListat
thetimeofraceregistrationtobeallowedtoparticipateinaUSCSAmeet
as a member of a scoring team, or as an individual eligible for USCSA
scoring purposes. Competitors who do not appear on the Regular or
RestrictedLicenseListmaycompeteataneventasaguestcompetitorat
theeventorganizersdiscretion.
2.3.1.7. For USCSA eligibility regulations, each one of the following are
considered separate ski & snowboard teams: Men's Alpine, Women's
Alpine, Men's Nordic, Women's Nordic, Men’s Freeski, Women’s Freeski,
Men’s Jumping, Women’s Jumping, Men's Snowboard and Women's
Snowboard.
2.3.2. PoliciesforMemberSchools
2.3.2.1. Anintercollegiateski&snowboardteammaynotcompeteinaclosed
ski&snowboardmeetorscrimmagewithoragainstanypublicorprivate
highschoolteam.
2.3.2.2. Intercollegiateteammembersmayparticipateinanopencompetition
in which high school students participate, but the event may not be
sponsored by the college or university, nor by any USCSA Conference.
Appeals for waiver may be made to the Chairperson of the USCSA
AcademicAffairsCommittee.
2.3.2.3. AUSCSAintercollegiateski&snowboardteammaynotcompeteasa
team in any event, collegiate or otherwise, unless the event is part of an
USCSAconferenceorhasbeenapprovedbytheUSCSAExecutiveBoard.
2.3.2.3.1.
AlleventsmustmeetUSCSAeligibilityrules.
2.3.2.3.2.
This does not affect individual competitors except for the
requirementformaintainingamateurstatus.
2.3.2.3.3.
As no race events were proposed to the Academic Affairs
committee, for exemptions for prize money to be won; the NCAA
rules of amateurism will remain in force. Therefore no race events
willbeexempt.
2.3.3. CanadianTeamParticipation
2.3.3.1. USCSAcompetitioniscoordinatedandsanctionedexclusivelythrough
UnitedStatesbasedCollegiateConferences.
2.3.3.2. Canadian college ski & snowboard teams may hold membership and
participateinaU.S.USCSAbasedaffiliatedconference.
2.3.3.3. CanadianteamsmustsolicitmembershipviatheUSCSAconferencein
which they wish to participate and such team(s) must meet all other
16
2016-2017CompetitionandRulesManual–ApprovedJanuary12,2017
2016.v.1.4
USCSA eligibility requirements in order to participate on a conference
level.
2.3.4. SnowboardIndividualEligibilityRequirements.
2.3.4.1. Theathletemustbeafull-timestudentandingoodacademicstanding
asrequiredbytheirinstitution.
2.4. EligibilityRequirementsforRegionalandNationalChampionships
AlltheregulationslistedunderEligibilityRequirementsforStudent-Athletesapplyto
individualsandteamsqualifyingforUSCSAregionalandnationalchampionships.In
addition,thefollowingregulationsapply.
2.4.1. RegulationsForParticipationInChampionships
2.4.1.1. A student-athlete may participate in the respective USCSA-United
States Collegiate Skiing and Snowboard Championships no more than a
totalofFOURtimes.
2.4.1.2. AskieriseligiblefortheUSCSAnationalchampionshipsifhe/shehas
aRegularCompetitorsLicense,andfortheUSCSAregionalchampionship
ifhe/shehasaRegularorRestrictedCompetitorsLicense.Theskiermust
also have been a member of the institution’s intercollegiate ski &
snowboard team during the majority of its most recent season, which
includes a majority of these intercollegiate season practices, and a
majorityofrequiredconferenceraceevents.
2.4.1.3. To be eligible for post-season events (Regionals and Nationals), a
racermusthaveparticipatedinaminimumoftwoconferenceevents,(in
separatemeets).
O.I.:(Official Interpretation): Separate meets means on two separate
weekends.
O.I.:Theavailabilityand/orinjurywaiversindicatethatifanathleteisnot
participating in ski & snowboard competition anywhere else, that he/she
canbemovedupwithoutanappeal,ifhe/shedoesnotfulfilltheminimum
requirementofthetwoconferenceevents(inseparatemeets).
17
2016-2017CompetitionandRulesManual–ApprovedJanuary12,2017
2016.v.1.4
2.4.1.4. A skier is eligible to compete in an USCSA conference, regional or
national championship if his/her name appears on the Affidavit of
Eligibility, holds a Regular competitors License, has participated in the
majority of the practices, and has been eligible and available to be a
substitute if called upon for a majority of the meets prior to post-season
ski&snowboardmeets.
O.I.:Available,meansavailabletorace.
O.I.:Astudentmatriculatingforadegree(graduateandundergraduate)in
his/hers6thacademicyear,maypetitiontoparticipate,providedhe/shehas
notcompetedinmorethanthreeyearsofcollegeski&snowboard.
2.4.1.5. A skier is not eligible to participate in a regional or national
championshiponanyski&snowboardteamunlesseligibleandavailable
to participate in 2 conference events and Regional qualifying meets
leadingtowardsthenationalchampionships.
2.4.1.6. Any individual or team must qualify for attendance at the national
championship through a USCSA regional championship. Only those
individuals and teams who so qualify are eligible for the United States
CollegiateSkiingandSnowboardChampionships.
2.4.1.7. Any college ski & snowboard team switching to USCSA national
affiliation (from NCAA, NJCAA, etc.) shall wait out one year prior to
becomingeligibletoparticipateintheUnitedStatesCollegiateSkiingand
Snowboard Championships, unless granted an exception by the USCSA
conference to which the team is applying for membership. Waiver for
sitting out one (1) USCSA national championship shall be made to the
conference of applicant and subsequently confirmed by the USCSA
ExecutiveBoardwhichshouldthenbeguidedbythatconference’swishes.
2.4.1.8. AnyathleteholdingaRestrictedCompetitorsLicenseisnoteligibleto
participateinaRegionalorNationalChampionshipevent.
2.4.2. SpecialRegulationsConcerningParticipationAtChampionships
18
2.4.2.1. If the institution does not have an intercollegiate ski & snowboard
team,anindividualskieriseligibletoparticipateintheconferenceraces
andregionalsornationalchampionshipsifotherwisequalified.
2016-2017CompetitionandRulesManual–ApprovedJanuary12,2017
2016.v.1.4
2.4.2.2. OnecompetitorfromaRestrictedLicenseteammayobtainaRegular
Competitors License which will allow one athlete to pursue qualification
for the Regional and National events. Application includes all
documentation required of a Regular Competitors License, including
submittalbytheTuesdaypriortoThanksgivingDay.
O.I.: An athlete who participates in a study abroad or off campus program
and is thus unable to participate in a majority of practices and to be
availableasasubstituteforamajorityofthemeetspriortothepost-season
shallstillbeeligibleforpost-seasoncompetitions.
2.5. Procedural Regulations for Submitting USCSA Team and Individual
RegistrationandEligibilityForms
2.5.1. USCSASki&SnowboardTeamandInstitutionalMembershipApplications
2.5.1.1. All participating teams must register annually with the USCSA by
submitting a Ski & Snowboard Team Membership Application, and the
USCSA Institutional Membership application, mailed to the USCSA
National Office no later than the Tuesday prior to Thanksgiving Day,
accompanied by a payment of a designated annual institutional and per
disciplineUSCSAdues.
2.5.1.2. Penalty for Non-Compliance: Teams not submitting the Ski &
Snowboard Team Membership and USCSA Institutional Membership
Applicationsbytheindicated(November)datewillbeissuedaRestricted
License and will be considered ineligible to compete in a regional or
nationalevent.
2.5.2. IndividualCompetitorRegistrationandLiabilityRelease
2.5.2.1. EachUSCSAraceparticipantisrequiredtocomplete,signandsubmit
to the USCSA national office an Individual Competitor Registration and
LiabilityReleaseform.Thecompletedformshouldbesubmittedthrough
their team officer, before the Tuesday prior to Thanksgiving Day. This
formwillincludealiabilityreleasestatementonbehalfoftheUSCSA,the
USSA,hostingskiareas,andallrelatedpersonnelandofficials.
2.5.2.2. Penalty For Non-Compliance: individual competitors, who do not
complete, sign and submit the required Individual Competitor
Registration and Liability Release form before the Tuesday, prior to
Thanksgiving Day shall be considered ineligible to race and shall remain
ineligible until the time a completed form is received by the National
Office.Atthattime,onlyaRestrictedLicensewillbeissued.
19
2016-2017CompetitionandRulesManual–ApprovedJanuary12,2017
2016.v.1.4
O.I.: Individual. Where it says, ‘a restricted license for’ an ‘individual
competitor’,thisreferstoindividualstryingtocompeteoutsideoftheteam.
(When there is only one person and they don’t have a team.) There is a
differentiationonlicensesforathletes,outsidethatscenario.Ifanathleteis
addedtoateam,he/shecomesunderwhatevertheteam’slicenseis.
2.5.3. Ski&SnowboardTeamEligibilityForms
2.5.3.1. The Ski & Snowboard Team Eligibility Form, listing all ski &
snowboardteammembers,requestedLicenseType,andrequesteditems
ofinformationconcerningacademiceligibilityisrequiredforvalidationof
institution (college) registration and athletic eligibility for all individuals
wishing to participate on a college ski & snowboard team competing
undertheauspicesoftheUSCSA.Certificationoftheathlete'seligibilityon
this form is from September to September. This form will be available
fromtheUSCSAnationalofficeorfromeachconferenceheadquarters.Itis
the responsibility of each team to secure this form, supply accurate and
completeinformationwhererequested,submitittotheproperauthorities
for additional information, verification and signature, and file one copy
with the USCSA national office no later than the Tuesday prior to
Thanksgiving Day of each year. Additions to team forms are permissible
priortothecompletionofthemidpointraceofateam’squalifyingseason.
Addedcompetitorsmaynotcompeteonascoringteamorbeincludedin
scoring for individual qualifying to regional championships without a
completed eligibility form and a USCSA Competition License. An athlete
may compete as a guest in the event at the discretion of the event
organizerbeforeUSCSAeligibilityisestablished,butcannotbeincludedin
the scoring for regional qualifications retroactively once eligibility is
established.
2.5.3.2. Penalty For Non-Compliance: A Team that has not submitted a
completed and signed Team Eligibility Form, accompanied with the
IndividualLiabilityandReleaseFormforeachathletenamedontheTeam
EligibilityFormpriortotheTuesdaybeforeThanksgivingDay:
2.5.3.2.1.
Will automatically be issued a Restricted Competitor License
only.ThereforenoTeammemberwillbeeligibletoparticipateinthe
RegionalorNationalevents.
2.5.3.2.2.
All liability forms must be completed and turned into the
nationalofficebeforetheTuesdaypriortoThanksgivingday.
2.5.3.2.3.
Written proof, with an institution’s registrar's stamp, that a
team'seligibilityformhasbeensubmittedtotheinstitutionpriorto
theNovemberdate.
2.5.3.2.4.
Aninstitutionhaspaiditsmembership
2.5.3.2.5.
Extensions are accepted at the discretion of the Academic
AffairsCommittee.
20
2016-2017CompetitionandRulesManual–ApprovedJanuary12,2017
2016.v.1.4
2.5.4. DeletionofAthleteNamesfromEligibilityForms.
2.5.4.1. Individual athlete names may be deleted from the affidavit of
eligibility,baseduponthefollowing
2.5.4.1.1.
Request for removal should be submitted to the USCSA
Academic Affairs Committee prior to the USCSA Competition and
RulesCommittees’meeting(Springofeachyear).
2.5.4.1.2.
Racer has participated in no intercollegiate ski & snowboard
eventsforthatinstitutioninsaidyear.
2.5.4.1.3.
Whenaracerisinjuredduringtheseasonandhascompetedin
no more than one- quarter of the school’s season of practices and
meets prior to the injury. Documentation covering such injury must
bepresentedatthetimetherequestismade,includingastatementof
attendingphysician.
2.6. ProtestsandAppealsConcerningEligibility
2.6.1. Protests which cannot be handled at the conference level must be lodged
withtheUSCSAAcademicAffairsCommitteebyanidentifiedrepresentativeof
aUSCSAinstitutionandbeaccompaniedbysubstantiatingevidence.
2.6.2. Any institution disqualified for failure to comply with eligibility
requirementsshallhavetherighttoappealtherulingtotheUSCSAAcademic
AffairsCommittee.
2.6.3. DecisionsmadebytheUSCSAAcademicAffairsCommitteemaybeappealed
totheUSCSAExecutiveBoard.
2.7. ReferencedNCAADivisionIIRules
2.7.1. TheUnitedStatesCollegiateSki&SnowboardAssociationvotedinMay1988
toadopt,byreference,thefollowingNCAAIIrules
2.7.1.1.
OperatingBylaw,Article12,Amateurism
2.7.1.2.
OperatingBylaw,Article13,Recruiting
2.7.1.3. Operating Bylaw, Article 14, Eligibility: Academic and General
Requirements
2.7.1.4.
OperatingBylaw,Article15,FinancialAid
2.7.1.5. Operating Bylaw, Article 16, Awards, Benefits & Expenses For
EnrolledStudentAthletes
2.7.1.6.
OperatingBylaw,Article17,Playing&PracticeSeasons
O.I.:WhentheNCAAusestheterm'dates',theymean'events',something
coveringtwodays.Therefore16datesmeans32days.
2.7.1.7.
21
Constitution,Article2.3,ThePrincipleOfEthicalConduct
2016-2017CompetitionandRulesManual–ApprovedJanuary12,2017
2016.v.1.4
2.7.1.8.
Constitution,Article2.10,ThePrincipleGoverningFinancialAid
2.7.1.9.
Constitution,Article5.2.2,OperatingBylaws
2.7.1.10. OperatingBylaw,Article10.1,UnethicalConduct
2.7.1.11. OperatingBylaw,Article10.4,DisciplinaryAction
2.7.1.12. Operating Bylaw, Article 11.1.1, Standards Of Honesty &
Sportsmanship
2.7.1.13. Operating Bylaw, Article 18.4.1, Eligibility For Championships -
StudentAthleteEligibility
2.7.1.14. Administrative Bylaw, Article 32.3.6,Disclosure Of Purpose Of
Interview
O.I. Pertaining to NCAA Season of competition 14.2.4.2.3, Proof of expenses
paidbyathletewillberequiredforeligibility.
2.7.2. DateOfRuleAdoptionAndUSCSACorollaries.TheaforereferencedNCAAII
rules that were adopted by the USCSA shall become effective May 15, 1988,
dateofadoption.ThefollowingUSCSAcorollariesshallapply.
2.7.2.1. InallinstancesinwhichcurrentreadingofNCAArulesrefertoNCAA,
pleasesubstituteUSCSAforamoreaccurateunderstandingoftheruling.
2.7.2.2. In all instances in which current wording refers to NCAA Academic
Requirements Committee or Council, please substitute the words USCSA
AcademicAffairsCommittee.
2.7.2.3. All institutions shall operate under the standards, set forth in the
NCAADivisionIIrules,ascitedabove.
2.7.2.4. When referring to pertinent NCAA rules, two-year institutions shall
substitutethewords2yearswherethetextreads4years,andthewords3
yearsforthewords5yearswherevertheyappearinthetext.
2.7.2.5. In addition, two-year institutions shall substitute the words 6
semesters where the text reads 10 semesters and 9 quarters where the
textreads15quarters.
2.7.2.6. For an institution that does not require SAT or ACT scores, a high
schoolGPAof2.0,inthecorecurriculum,asdefinedbytheNCAADivision
II,willsufficeaseligible.
22
NOTE:CopiesoftheNCAADivisionIIRulesManualmaybeobtainedfromNCAA
Publishingonlineatwww.ncaa.org.
2016-2017CompetitionandRulesManual–ApprovedJanuary12,2017
2016.v.1.4
3.0 SECTION3–ALPINERULES
3.1. FISAndUSSARulesversusUSCSARules
3.1.1. USCSAalpinecompetitionsshallbegovernedbythemostcurrenteditionof
thefollowingrulebooks;USCSAAlpineRules,USSAAlpineCompetitionRules
pertaining to scored U19 and Sr. events. (Not USSA Masters rules, unless
specificallyreferencedwithintheUSCSArules)andtheFIS(ICR).USCSAalpine
competitionsshallbegovernedfirstbytheUSCSArules,second,inallareasnot
specificallycovered,theUSSAAlpineCompetitionrulesshallbeused,andthird,
inallareasnotspecificallycoveredtheFIS(ICR)shallbeused.Innocaseshalla
USCSArulebeenforcedthatviolatesaUSSArule.FISandUSSArulebooksare
available,onlineatwww.ussa.organdwww.fis-ski.com.
3.2. ProtestsConcerningAlpineEvents
3.2.1. Protests concerning Disqualification or Timing: A protest against a
disqualificationortimingmustbegiveninwriting,byateamofficertoavoting
memberofthejuryandbeaccompaniedbyacashdeposit;forRegionaland
Nationals the deposit is $50, $100 protest fee for equipment. Such protests
must be received within the specified time period for the particular type of
protest. The deposit will be refunded if the protest is upheld. Such protests
must be received within the specific time period, for the particular type of
protest.SeedisqualificationsintheUSSAcompguide.
3.2.2. Appeals
3.2.2.1. For all events not sanctioned by the USSA or FIS, appeals against a
decisionofthejury,aprotestispermissibleto
3.2.2.1.1.
TheConferenceAppealsBoard(ConferenceRaces)
3.2.2.1.2.
TheRegionalAppealsBoard(RegionalRaces)
3.2.2.1.3.
TheUSCSACompetition/RulesCommittee(NationalEvents)
3.2.3. For all events sanctioned by the USSA or FIS follow the appeal procedures
outlined by the appropriate governing organization. If the appeal concerns a
USCSArulefollowtheprocedurepresentedinsection3.2.2.1.1.
3.2.4. The USCSA Competition and Rules Committee shall hear all protests
regarding USCSA rules at national events. Any member of the USCSA
Competition and Rules Committee who may have served on the jury being
protested, or are representatives of schools involved therein, shall be
disqualifiedfromthedeliberationsonthatissue.
3.2.5. The appeal, in writing and with substantiating particulars, must always be
submittedtotheappropriateappealsboard,ormailedtheretowithin14days
aftertheannouncementofthepreviousdecisionontheprotests(notcounting
theannouncementday).
23
2016-2017CompetitionandRulesManual–ApprovedJanuary12,2017
2016.v.1.4
3.3. EquipmentRulesSpecifictoUSCSA
3.3.1. TheUSCSAadherestoallUSSAEquipmentrulesforcompetitionsasdefined
in the USSA Alpine Rules (http://alpine.usskiteam.com/alpineprograms/athletes/rules). In any areas not specifically covered by the USSA,
thentheFIS(ICR)rulesshallbeused.
3.3.2. For the 2016-2017 season only, the USCSA will follow the USSA Master's
rulesasdefinedintheUSSAAlpineEquipmentGuidewithregardtoonlyGiant
Slalomskiturnradiusrequirements.
3.4. JointRegulationsforSlalom,GiantSlalom
3.4.1. Seeding–Alpine
3.4.1.1. Participating full teams shall have one racer placed in each of the 5
seeds.Theorderofteamsshallbegeneratedbyrandomselectionwithin
eachseed.Thereshallbeseparatedrawsforbothslalomandgiantslalom
3.4.1.2. The seeding of outstanding individual competitors (Regional and
Nationals) for slalom and giant slalom shall be placed between the first
andsecondseed.Therandomselectionoftheseindividualrepresentatives
shallbedeterminedbydrawattheseedingmeeting.(ForNationals:Ifan
outstanding individual competitor is also a member of an Invitational
team, he/she will maintain the outstanding individual competitor
seeding.)
3.4.1.3. The BIBO method of seeding shall be used for alpine competition.
BIBOseedingisusedinthesecondrunofslalomandgiantslalomevents.
O.I.: The BIBO method of seeding shall be used for Alpine competitions as
statedintheUSSACompGuideRule.U621.11.3Atleastonehourbeforethe
competition, if deemed appropriate by the jury, reversing the number of
teamsispermissible.
3.4.1.4. Seeding for the second run of alternate racers shall be at the
discretionoftheChiefofRace,tobeannouncedpriortotheevent.
3.4.1.5. Thenumberandagesofthefollowingcompetitorsshallbelimited:5
men and 5 women. U19’s only will be entered as a team by the USSA
Divisional Selection Chairperson. However, if the institution is having a
localclubhostitsevent,thelocalclubmayenterupto5moremenand5
more women of seniors, U19’s and U16’s only. These racers will be
enteredattheendofthecollegefield.
3.4.1.6.
NationalChampionship-InvitationalAlpineTeams
3.4.1.6.1.
First run shall have one racer in each of the five (5) seeds to
start at the end of all qualified teams and outstanding individual
24
2016-2017CompetitionandRulesManual–ApprovedJanuary12,2017
2016.v.1.4
competitors.Thus,thefirstcompetitorfromaninvitationalteamwill
start101st,ifthefieldof100qualifiedcompetitorsisfilled.
3.4.1.6.2.
The second shall be run in BIBO format with all competitors
(invitationalandqualifiedteams)seededinorderoffinishfromthe
firstrun.
3.4.2. SullivanSeedingSystem
3.4.2.1. At any USCSA event, excluding US Collegiate Ski & Snowboard
National Championships™, the Sullivan Seeding system, if so desired and
announcedontheraceannouncement,thesecondrunrunningordershall
begeneratedasfollows.Followingthecompletionofthefirstrun;
3.4.2.1.1.
Rank the teams by summing the times of the three fastest
skiersfromeachteamtodetermineathletesin“TheCut”,
3.4.2.1.2.
Theremainingathletes,notscoringfortheirrespectiveteams,
arerankedinorderofdescendingfirstruntimes(slowesttofastest)
“TheFlip”,
3.4.2.1.3.
The second run running order is developed in the following
manner;
3.4.2.1.3.1.
TheathletesintheFlipareseededfirstfollowedbythe
athletesintheCut,
3.4.2.1.3.2.
In the Cut, teams will race in reverse order of team
place following the first run (slowest to fastest), within each
teamtheathleteswillbeseededslowesttofastest.
3.4.2.2. Outstanding Individuals and Guest athletes will be seed according to
theirfirstruntimeintheFlip.Nospecialconsiderationswillbemadefor
Four-WayTeams.
3.4.3. RandomDrawProcedure
3.4.3.1. StepI.Determinethenumberofteamsandthenumberofcompetitors
perteam.Therewillbeonbibsetforeachteamdesignatedbyletters.One
seed will consist of the total numbers of teams competing. Example: 19
teams,thebibsetswillbeletteredAtoS,withaseedof19competitors.
Individual competitors will be inserted after the 1st seed. So if there are
19 teams and 5 individuals, bibs 20-24 will be used for the individual
competitors.
Establish the remaining seeds, so you know what bib numbers go in the
remainingseeds.
3.4.3.2. StepII.Randomlyassignanumberfromeachseed,toabibset.Sothat
onenumberfromeachteamseedgoestoonebibset.Youcanaccomplish
25
2016-2017CompetitionandRulesManual–ApprovedJanuary12,2017
2016.v.1.4
this by either by drawing numbers and letter out of a hat or by using a
randomizeronacomputer.
3.4.3.3. StepIII.Doadoublerandomdraw.Yourandomlypickateam,then
thatteamrandomlypicksabibset.Thesameisdonefortheindividuals.
Itisrecommendedthatyouusedifferentbibsets(groupsofbibs)foreach
event,sothatthebibsforeachdaymaybedoneaheadoftime.
3.5. USSARaceEventRegistration
3.5.1. USCSAalpineracesmaybeUSSAregisteredevents.
3.6. AlpineSkiingParallelEvent
3.6.1. Eligibility
3.6.1.1. Teams: will be eligible to compete in the USCSA National
ChampionshipsTeamParallelEventonlyiftheyqualifiedasanAlpineor
4-wayteamfortheUSCSANationalChampionships
3.6.1.2. Individuals: will be eligible to compete in the USCSA National
ChampionshipsIndividualParallelEventonlyiftheyqualifiedasanAlpine
individualfortheUSCSANationalChampionshipsorareguestindividual
athlete.
3.6.2. TeamSize
3.6.2.1.
5competitorswillcompriseateam
3.6.3. Definitions
3.6.3.1. Parallel Race. The Parallel race is a competition where two
competitors race simultaneously side by side down two courses. The
settingofthecourses,theconfigurationofthegroundandthepreparation
ofthesnowaretobeasidenticalaspossible.
3.6.3.2. Vertical Drop. The vertical drop of the course should be between 80
and 100 m. There should be between 20 and 30 gates, not counting the
start and finish. The runtime of each race should be between 20 and 25
seconds.
3.6.4. ChoiceandPreparationoftheCourse
3.6.4.1. Choose a slope wide enough to permit two or more courses,
preferably slightly concave (permitting a view of the whole course from
anypoint).Theterrainvariationsshouldbethesameacrossthesurfaceof
theslope.Thecourselayoutsshouldhavethesameprofileandthesame
difficulties.
3.6.4.2. Over the full width of the chosen slope, the snow should be
consistently hard, similar to course preparation for Slalom, so that it is
possibletoofferequalraceconditionsonbothcourses.
3.6.4.3. The Organizer should provide transport for the athletes back to the
startintheshortesttimepossible.
26
2016-2017CompetitionandRulesManual–ApprovedJanuary12,2017
2016.v.1.4
3.6.4.4. Aliftnexttothecourseispreferredtoensurethattheracesarerun
smoothlyandrapidly.
3.6.4.5. The course should be entirely closed off by barriers. It is
recommendedtofenceoffreservedplacesintendedforcoaches,trainers,
competitors,andservicemen.
3.6.5. TheCourses
3.6.5.1. Eachcourseisdesignatedbyaseriesofgates,polesorcurvemarkers;
each gate marker is composed of two slalom poles with a GS gate flag
stretchedbetweenthemandfastenedinsuchawaysoastotearorbreak
away. A short stubby pole and a tall static pole connected together by a
triangulargatepanel(asinasnowboardgatesystem)maybeused.
3.6.5.2. Poles and flags are red for the course on skiers left and blue for the
courseonskier'sright.Thebottomoftheflagsmustbeatleastapprox.1
m above the snow (exception: use of a snowboard gate/triangular panel
systems).
3.6.5.3. The same course setter establishes the courses and makes sure they
areidenticalandparallel.Theymustensurethatthecourseflowissmooth
andthatthereisvarietyinthecurves(verypronouncedcurves)andthat
thecoursecausesrhythmchanges.Innocaseshouldthiseventresemblea
longstraightrunfromtoptobottom.Aturningradiusof13-15metersis
recommended.
3.6.5.4. Thefirstgateineachcourseshouldbeplacednolessthan8mfrom
thestartandnomorethan10m.
3.6.5.5. Shortly before the finish line, after the last gate, the separation
between the two courses must be well marked so that they direct each
competitortowardsthemiddlepartoftherespectivefinish.
3.6.5.6.
DistancebetweentheTwoCourses
3.6.5.6.1.
Thedistancebetweentwocorrespondinggatesmarkers(from
turning pole to turning pole) should be no less than 10 m and no
morethan12m.
3.6.5.6.2.
Thecoursesettershallusea“triangulation”methodtoensure
accuracy between courses. Triangulation ensures that the vertical
distancefromaturningpoletothenextturningpoleoneachcourse
is identical, and that the horizontal distance between the turning
polesofeachcourseisidenticalthroughout.
3.6.5.6.3.
The course setter may make slight modifications before the
first competitors start, based on observation of forerunners and/or
inputfromforerunners. 27
2016-2017CompetitionandRulesManual–ApprovedJanuary12,2017
2016.v.1.4
3.6.5.6.4.
The jury may decide to insert up to two jumps in the course.
Thelipofthejumpshouldbenomorethan1.5meters(4’)abovethe
snowsurfaceatthebaseofthejump.
3.6.6. TheStart
3.6.6.1.
StartDevice
3.6.6.1.1.
Twohingeddoorseachapproximately100cmwide,40cmin
height,andwiththebottomedgeofthegateapproximately100-125
cm above the ground. The doors should be capable of simultaneous
and/ordelayedopening.Openingofthedoorsisideallybyelectronic
control. The bolt (lock) system should utilize an electromagnet so
thatthestartgatesopensimultaneously.Thisstartsystemcouldalso
bemanuallyoperated.Dropstyledoors(asusedinskierandboarder
X)ispermittedwitheitherelectronicormanualreleasemechanisms.
3.6.6.1.2.
The Jury and the starter together will control the start. The
startsignalcanonlybegivenaftertheJuryhasgiventhecompetitors
permission to start. Any starting system can be employed provided
thatthesystemguaranteesasimultaneousstart.
3.6.6.1.3.
FalseStarts(barging)
3.6.6.1.3.1.
Penaltieswilloccur:
3.6.6.1.3.1.1. If the competitor goes through the hinge door before
thestartcommand.
3.6.6.1.3.1.2. If the competitor does not have both ski poles set
behindthecloseddoor.
3.6.6.1.3.1.3. Ifthecompetitorusesthestartdoorsforassistance.
3.6.6.1.4.
StartCommand
3.6.6.1.4.1.
Beforethestartergivesthecommandofeither"Ready-
Set"andthesubsequentfiringofthestartingsignalwhichopens
thestarthingedoors,hemustfirstensurethatthecompetitors
are ready by asking the competitor starting in the red course
"Red ready?" and then the competitor in the blue course "Blue
ready?". Only after both competitors have answered "yes", the
startercangivethestartcommand.
3.6.6.1.4.2.
Ifoneorbothstartingdoorsfailtoopenthestartmust
berepeated.
3.6.7. TheFinish
3.6.7.1. Thefinishareasmustbesymmetrical.Thelineintothefinishmustbe
parallelwiththelineofthestartposts.
28
2016-2017CompetitionandRulesManual–ApprovedJanuary12,2017
2016.v.1.4
3.6.7.2. Eachfinishlineismarkedbytwopolesconnectedbyabannerwhich
formsthefinish.Eachofthesemustbeatleast8mwide.Theinsidepoles
oftheareasareplacedsidebyside.
3.6.7.3. It is necessary to set up visually separate finish approaches and to
keepthecoursesseparatedafterthefinishlineexits.
3.6.8. JuryandCourseSetter
3.6.8.1.
TheJuryissetupasfollows(USSAorUSCSAOfficials):
3.6.8.1.1.
TheTechnicalDelegate
3.6.8.1.2.
TwoReferees
3.6.8.1.3.
TheChiefofRace
3.6.8.2. ThecoursesetterisdesignatedbytheJuryofthecompetition.Before
setting the parallel course, he should conduct an inspection and study of
thecourseinthepresenceoftheJuryandthoseresponsibleforthecourse.
(TheChiefofRaceandtheChiefofCourse).
3.6.9. Timing
3.6.9.1. Asthestartissimultaneous,onlythedifferenceintimebetweenthe
competitors at the finish will be registered, with electronic eyes and an
automatic print-out, the first competitor that breaks one of the signals
starts the clock and receives the time "zero", the following competitors
stop successively the clocks (chronometers) and receive the time
difference in 1/1000-seconds to the first competitor. For some special
events running times may be used to determine rankings (break ties or
theawardofprizes).
3.6.9.2.
3.6.10.
AminimumofanA&Btimingsystemarerequired.
Inspection
3.6.10.1. Thecompetitorsmayinspectthecourseoncefromtoptobottomwith
skison.Inspectiontimeis10minutes.
3.6.11.
ControloftheRuns/Races
3.6.11.1. The gate judges are situated on both exterior sides of the courses.
Eachgatejudgeissuppliedwithaflagwhichcorrespondstothecolorof
the course he is controlling (either blue or red). This flag is to be used
immediately to notify the Jury of a disqualification in his section of the
course.
3.6.11.2. A Jury member with a yellow flag is located approximately halfway
downthecourse.TheJurymemberjudgeswhetheragatejudge'sraising
theredorblueflagwasjustifiedornot.Raisingtheyellowflagonthered
orbluecourseconfirmsthedisqualificationofthecompetitor.
3.6.11.3. Disqualifications/DidNotFinish
29
2016-2017CompetitionandRulesManual–ApprovedJanuary12,2017
2016.v.1.4
3.6.11.3.1.
Causesfordisqualificationsarethefollowing:
3.6.11.3.1.1.
Secondbarge(startedtoosoon)
3.6.11.3.1.2.
Changingfromonecoursetoanother
3.6.11.3.1.3.
Interferingwithopponent,voluntarilyornot
3.6.11.3.1.4.
Notpassingthroughagatecorrectly(straddle)
3.6.11.3.1.5.
Notfinishing
3.6.11.4. Protestofresults
3.6.11.4.1. Each round of brackets may be protested for the 15 minutes
following the posting of the result for the final race in the bracket.
Protests outside of this window will be entertained at the jury’s
discretion,butnotafteranybracketthatdependsontheresultunder
protesthasstartedrunning.
3.6.11.4.2. Postingtimeforthelastresultineachbracketshouldbenoted
inproximitytothepostedresult
3.6.11.4.3. Thefinishrefereemustbeverballynotifiedoftheprotestbya
coachorcaptainoftheprotestingteamwithinthis5minutewindow.
Thefinishreferee’spositionwillbenotedattheseedmeeting.
3.6.11.4.4. A written protest must be submitted within 5 minutes of
notifyingthefinishreferee
3.6.11.4.5. No bracket which depends on the result of a bracket under
protestorwhichdependsonabracketwithanopenprotestmaybe
run. Any runs in violation of this rule must be re-run when the
protestisresolvedortheprotestperiodispast.
3.6.11.5. SlalomRules
3.6.11.5.1. Inthecaseofissuesoritemsnotcoveredabove,theRulesfor
Slalommustbeconsidered.
3.6.12.
Competition
3.6.12.1. Coaches and/or Team Captains will submit a seed list prior to the
competition at the seed meeting. Athletes shall be ranked A through E.
This order will be used throughout the competition. Competitors on the
sameteamshouldbegivenconsecutivebibnumbers.
3.6.12.2. TeamSeeding
3.6.12.2.1. TeamsareseededbyusingtheUSCSANationalChampionship
overallteamscoresfromGS,lastplacewillbeseeded1st,2ndtolast
placeseeded2nd…1stplaceseededlast.
3.6.12.2.2. Theteamswillbepopulatedintoa“roundof32bracket”based
on their seed (see attached template). If less than 32 teams are
competing,therewillbebyestotheroundof16tothehigherseeded
30
2016-2017CompetitionandRulesManual–ApprovedJanuary12,2017
2016.v.1.4
teams. If there are 16 or less teams, the teams will be put into
appropriatelysizedbrackets(appropriatebracketsizesare:32,16,8,
4,or2).
3.6.12.3. SINGLERUNELIMINATIONFORMAT
3.6.12.3.1. 2athletesfromeachteamwillrunontheredcourseand2on
the blue course per round. The higher seeded team may choose
whichcoursethe5thor“E”skierwillrun.Thestartordershallbeas
follows:
"Red Course" higher seeded team A skier against "Blue Course" lower
seededteamAskier
"Red Course" lower seeded team B skier against "Blue Course" higher
seededteamBskier
"Red Course" higher seeded team C skier against "Blue Course" lower
seededteamCskier
"Red Course" lower seeded team D skier against "Blue Course" higher
seededteamDskier
3.6.12.3.2. Higher seeded team gets to choose the red or blue course for
their E skier. Lower seeded team takes the other course for their E
skier.TheE-skierfromthehigherseedwillprovidehis/herchoiceof
course on the starter’s command. Failure to choose a course in a
reasonable amount of time will be treated as a DNS for the racer
makingthedecision.
3.6.12.4. ScoringAndTeamAdvancement
3.6.12.4.1. The winner of a run earns 1 point for the team. A team may
earn a maximum of 5 points per round. If there is a tie on the run,
bothteamsareawarded1point
3.6.12.4.2. A minimum of 3 skiers shall constitute a team. A team that
doesnothaveall5memberswillentertheheatwithapointdeficit
(maximum of 2 for a team with 3 skiers). Teams of less than 5
competitorsmustseedtheirathletesstartingwithA.
3.6.12.4.3. Theteamthathas3ormorepointsfromaroundshalladvance
tothenextround.
3.6.12.4.4. Consolation brackets will only exist in the final round, to
determine3rdand4thplace.
3.6.12.4.5. Intheeventofatieinthenumberofpoints,theteamwiththe
largest number of successfully completed runs will advance. If a tie
still exists, the team with the lowest total differential time of
31
2016-2017CompetitionandRulesManual–ApprovedJanuary12,2017
2016.v.1.4
completedcompetitorswillwintheheat.Ifatiestillexists,theteam
advanceswhichhadthecompetitorthatmadeitthefurthestonthe
lastrunofhead-to-headcompetitionbetweentheteams.
3.6.12.4.6. Ifbothcompetitorsweredisqualifiedordidnotfinishtherun,
thecompetitorwhoskiedthefurthestdistanceintherunwillearna
pointfortheirteam.
3.6.13.
IndividualCompetition
3.6.13.1. The Seeding for the individual parallel slalom will be based on SL
results.
3.6.13.2. Individualswillbeplacedintoa“roundof8Bracket”forcompetition
(or appropriately sized bracket, 16, 8, 4, 2 are acceptable). Higher seeds
willbegivenbye’s,ifthebracketisnotcompletelyfilled.
3.6.13.3. Each bracketed round will be made up of the higher seeded athlete
choosingtheredorbluecourseandthelowerseededathletewilltakethe
othercourse.Thehigherseedwillprovidehis/herchoiceofcourseonthe
Starter’scommand.Failuretochooseacourseinareasonableamountof
time will be treated as a DNS for the racer making the decision. The
competitorwhocompletestherunthefastest,movesontothenextround.
3.6.13.4. Ifbothcompetitorsdonotfinishtherunorifbothweredisqualified,
the competitor who skied the furthest distance will advance to the next
round.
32
3.6.13.5. Consolationroundsareonlyheldinthefinalround,todetermine3rd
and4thplace.
2016-2017CompetitionandRulesManual–ApprovedJanuary12,2017
2016.v.1.4
4.0 SECTION4–NORDICRULES
4.1. FISandUSSArulesversusUSCSArules
4.1.1. USCSANordiccompetitionsshallbegovernedbythemostcurrenteditionof
thefollowingrulebooks;USCSANordicRules,USSANordicCompetitionRules
and the FIS (ICR). USCSA Nordic competitions shall be governed first by the
USCSA rules, second, in all areas not specifically covered, the USSA Nordic
Competitionrulesshallbeused,andthird,inallareasnotspecificallycovered
the FIS (ICR) shall be used. In no case shall a USCSA rule be enforced that
violates the USSA sanctioning or scoring of the event. FIS rulebooks are
availablefromUSSA,POBox100,ParkCity,UT84060,ph.(435)649-9090or
on-lineatwww.ussa.organdwww.fis-ski.com.
4.2. TheNordicEvent
4.2.1. TheNordiccourseshallbelaidoutsoastobeatruetestofthecompetitors'
strength,endurance,skitechniqueandtacticalknowledge.
4.2.2. The length of the course and race format at Nationals shall be defined per
below. The National format may be altered for Conference and Regional
Championships.
4.2.2.1.
EvenYearFormat
DayOne(Tuesday):MenandWomen’s7.5kFreestyle,30secondinterval
DayTwo(Wednesday):Men&Women’s1.5kClassicSprint
Dayfour(Friday):MenandWomen’s15kClassic,MassStart
Dayfive(Saturday):MenandWomen’sTeamSprint:FR,FR,FR
4.2.2.2.
OddYearFormat
DayOne(Tuesday):MenandWomen’s7.5kClassic,30secondinterval
DayTwo(Wednesday):Men&Women’s1.5kFreestyleSprint
Dayfour(Friday):MenandWomen’s15kFreestyle,MassStart
Dayfive(Saturday):MenandWomen’sTeamSprint:CL,CL,CL
4.2.3. Theheightdifference,maximumclimbandtotalclimbshallbethefollowing:
Ladies15kHD=200m;MC=100m;TC=400-550m
Ladies8.5kHD=100m;MC=50m;TC=150-225m
Men's15kHD=200m;MC=100m;TC=400-550m
Men's8.5kHD=100m;MC=50m;TO=150-225m
4.2.4. SprintRace.Thesprintracewillconsistofanindividualstartqualificationat
30-second intervals. The top 20 will then compete in 4 Quarter Final heats
consistingof5racerseach(QuarterFinal#1–Racers1,8,9,16and20Quarter
33
2016-2017CompetitionandRulesManual–ApprovedJanuary12,2017
2016.v.1.4
Final#2–Racers4,5,12,13and17,QuarterFinal#3–Racers2,7,10,15and
18 and Quarter Final #4 – Racers 3, 6, 11, 14 and 19 based on qualification
ranking). From the Quarter Finals , the top 2 finishers in each heat and two
“LuckyLosers*”willqualifyfor2SemiFinalheatsconsistingof5racerseach
(Semi Final #1 – racers Q1 #1, Q1 #2, Q2 #1, Q2 #2 and Lucky Loser #1 and
SemiFinal#2–racersQ3#1,Q3#2,Q4#1,Q3#2andLuckyLoser#2)From
theSemi–finals,thetop2finishersineachheatandthefastest“LuckyLoser*”
will qualify for the A Final (to determine finishers 1 – 5) and the next 2
finishers in each heat and the ‘Lucky Loser*” will qualify for B Final (to
determine finishers 6 – 10). The remaining skiers in each Semi Final will be
ranked based on their qualification time. All skiers not in the top 20 will be
rankedbasedontheirqualifyingtime.Inthesprintfinalsthestartingpositions
are chosen by the athletes according to the following: Quarter Finals –
qualificationtimes(rankings)areused,Semi-finals–rankingsfromtheQuarter
Finalsandqualificationtimesareused,Finals–rankingsfromtheSemi-finals
andqualificationtimesareused.
*Incompetitionswhentheheatsarenottimed,the5thpositionsinthefinalheats
areassignedfromthe3rdrankedcompetitorsinallthesemi-finalheats.The3rd
rankedcompetitorwiththefastestqualifyingtimeisassignedtothefirstFinals1
andthe3rdrankedcompetitorwiththesecondbestqualifyingtimeisassignedto
Finals2.
4.2.4.1. If a non-scoring athlete qualifies in the top 20 after the sprint
qualification, an additional scoring athlete will be added to the Quarter
Final round using this metric: Quarter Final #1 – racer 21, Quarter Final
#2 – racer 24, Quarter Final #3 – racer 25, Quarter Final #4 – racer 22,
Quarter Final #5 – 23. In the sprint finals the starting positions of these
additionalscoringathletesarechosenaccordingtothequalificationtimes
(rankings). For advancement to Semi-Finals and Finals see rule 1.04. If
thereisnota6thlaneavailabletheadditionalathletewillstartbehindthe
racer of her/his choice. Non-scoring athletes who place 21-25 will not
advance.
4.2.5. TeamSprintisarelay-competitionwiththreeathleteswhoalternatelyski3
legs of a minimum of 1km and a maximum 1.5km each with all competitors
skiingthesameloop
4.2.6. FollowingtheleadsetbytheU.S.NordicChampionships,theNordiccourse
fortheUnitedStatesCollegiateSkiingChampionshipsshallnotbeabove2200
meters (7260') unless such standards are specifically waived by the Nordic
CompetitionandRulesCommittee.
4.2.7. Ifthejurydeterminesthatanathletewasskatinginanindividualraceusing
the Classical Technique (defined by USSA Nordic Rulebook 314.1) the athlete
willbedisqualifiedforthatevent.
34
2016-2017CompetitionandRulesManual–ApprovedJanuary12,2017
2016.v.1.4
4.2.8. IfthejurydeterminesthatanathletewasskatingintheClassicalTechnique
(defined by USSA Nordic Rulebook 314.1) leg of a relay race the athlete will
receive the time of the slowest athlete in the race for all legs utilizing the
ClassicalTechnique.
4.3. ProtestsConcerningNordicEvents
4.3.1. Protests concerning Disqualification or Timing: A Protest against
disqualificationortimingmustbegiveninwriting,byateamofficertoavoting
member of the jury and be accompanied by a cash deposit; for Regional and
Nationals the deposit is $25.00. Such protests must be received within the
specified time period for the particular type of protest. The deposit will be
refunded if the protest is upheld. Such protests must be received within the
specifictimeperiod,fortheparticulartypeofprotest.Seedisqualificationsin
theUSSAcompguide.
4.3.2. Appeals
4.3.2.1. For all events not sanctioned by the USSA or FIS, appeals against a
decisionofthejury,aprotestispermissibleto:
4.3.2.1.1.
TheConferenceAppealsBoard(ConferencesRaces)
4.3.2.1.2.
TheRegionalAppealsBoard(RegionalRaces)
4.3.2.1.3.
TheUSCSACompetition/RulesCommittee(NationalEvents)
4.3.2.2. For all events sanctioned by the USSA or FIS follow the appeal
procedures outlined by the appropriate governing organization. If the
appeal concerns a USCSA rule follow the procedure presented in section
4.3.2.1.1above.
4.3.2.3. The USCSA Competition and Rules Committee shall hear all protests
regarding USCSA rules at national events. Any member of the USCSA
CompetitionandRulesCommitteewhomayhaveservedonthejurybeing
protested, or are representatives of schools involved therein, shall be
disqualifiedfromthedeliberationsonthatissue.
4.3.2.4. The appeal, in writing and with substantiating particulars, must
alwaysbesubmittedtotheappropriateappealsboard,ormailedthereto
within 14 days after the announcement of the previous decision on the
protests(notcountingtheannouncementday).
4.4. SeedingofNordicChampionshipCompetitorsforNationalEvents
4.4.1. SeeAlpinerulessectionitem2.02forrandomdrawprocedures.
4.4.2. Teamcompetitorswillbeplacedinto5seedgroupsbasedonarandomdraw
within each seed. Teams will choose which of their team members will be
placed into each seed at the coaches/seeding meeting prior to the event.
Changes in the seed order will not be allowed after that time. Ill or injured
competitorsmaybereplacedbyanalternatewithdirectsubstitutionsonly.
35
2016-2017CompetitionandRulesManual–ApprovedJanuary12,2017
2016.v.1.4
4.4.3. Individualcompetitorswillbeseededbyrandomdrawandplacedwithinthe
seed groups of their choice. Their preference must be stated to the Chief of
Raceby12noon(localtime)ofthedaypriortotheeventthecompetitorwill
be participating in. Individuals not stating their preference will be seeded at
thediscretionoftheRaceCommittee.
36
4.4.4. Inamassstart,lanememberswillbeassignedpriortothelaneassignment
draw.Thelaneassignmentswillbemadeonthebasisofadoublerandomdraw
whereboththeschoolnameandlanenumberarerandomlydrawn.Lane1is
themiddletrack,lane2isonskiersrightofthemiddletrack,lane3isonskiers
leftofthemiddletrack,andallremainingtracknumbersfollowthispattern.
2016-2017CompetitionandRulesManual–ApprovedJanuary12,2017
2016.v.1.4
5.0 SECTION5–SNOWBOARDRULES
5.1. USASA,USSAandFISRulesvs.USCSARules
5.1.1. Official Snowboard Competition Rules for the USCSA Conference qualifying
meets and Regional Championships leading to the “United States Collegiate
SnowboardChampionships”(TM).
5.1.2. IftheUSCSAcompetitionissanctionedbytheUSASA,thentheUSASArules
shallgovernUSCSAsnowboardcompetitioninallareasnotspecificallycovered
intheUSCSARuleBook.USASArulingsarereferencedwith(USASA)brackets.
USASA rulebooks are available for download at www.USASA.org. USCSA
competitionsshallbegovernedfirstbytheUSCSArules;second,inallareasnot
specificallycovered,theUSASACompetitionrulesshallbeused.
5.1.3. IftheUSCSAcompetitionissanctionedbyFIS(ICR)andUSSA,thenFISand
USSA rules shall govern USCSA snowboard competition in all areas not
specifically covered in the USCSA Rule Book. FIS and USSA rulings are
referencedwith{FIS}(USSA)brackets.FISandUSSArulebooksareavailable
from USSA, PO Box 100, Park City, UT 84060, ph. (435) 649-9090 and from
eachorganization'swebsite.USCSAcompetitionsshallbegovernedfirstbythe
USCSArules,second,inallareasnotspecificallycovered,theUSSACompetition
rulesshallbeused,andthird,inallareasnotspecificallycoveredtheFIS(ICR)
shallbeused.
5.1.4. Inallinstancesofcompetition,thesanctioninggoverningbodyshouldbethe
primary rule provider. When ambiguity arises by following the rules of the
sanctioninggoverningbody,thenuseofthealternategoverningbodyruleswill
beused.
5.2. TheStart
5.2.1. The start area must be closed off so that only the starting competitors and
officialsconcernedwiththestartarelocatedinthearea.Thestartareamustbe
protected appropriately against inclement weather. A special roped off area
mustbe,providedfortrainers,teamcaptains,etc.,inwhichtheymaytakecare
ofthewaitingcompetitorswithoutbeinginterruptedbythepublic.
5.2.2. The Start ramp shall be prepared in such a way that the competitors can
standrelaxedonthestartingline,andcanquicklyreachfullspeedafterleaving
the starting gate. Push off posts will be installed at the starting gate for all
events.Thespecificationswillbeadjustedtotheneedsofthespecificevents.
5.2.3. ThepostssupportingtheGiantSlalomstartinggateshouldbeapproximately
60-90 cm apart and shall not project more than 50 cm above the snow. The
startinggate,consistingofastartingmechanismsconnectedontoawand(set
below the knee), will be placed so that starting is impossible without its
opening.
37
2016-2017CompetitionandRulesManual–ApprovedJanuary12,2017
2016.v.1.4
5.2.4. No official or attendant who could possibly give an advantage to or disturb
thestartingcompetitormaybebehindhim/her.Alloutsidehelpisforbidden.
By order of the starter, the competitor must take his/her place behind the
startinggate.Thestartermustnottouchthecompetitoratthestart.Pushingoff
fromthestartpostsorothersimilaraidsisallowed.
5.2.5. The Starter: After he/she has ascertained that the course is ready, and ten
secondsbeforethestart,thestartershallgiveeachcompetitora"Tensecond"
alert.Fivesecondsbeforethestarthe/sheshallcount"5,4,3,2,1"andthengive
the audible start command of "GO". The window to start is 10 seconds. For
SnowboardCross,thestartergivesthecompetitorthewarning“Ridersready–
Goattention“–randomly1-4secondsbeforethedoorsopen.
5.2.6. A competitor who is not ready to start 1 minute after being called, will be
disqualified.TheStartRefereemay,however,excusesuchadelayif,inhis/her
opinion,thedelayisdueto"forcemajeure",andallowthestartprovisionally.
(For example, breakdown of a competitor's personal equipment or minor
sicknessofacompetitordoesnotconstitute"forcemajeure".)Inthiscase,the
delayedcompetitorstartsattheendofthecurrentseed.TheStartRefereewill
makethenecessarydecisionsinthecaseofalatestartandmustimmediately
informthereferee,givingthestartnumberandnameofthecompetitor(s)who
weretobeallowedtostartbecauseoflateappearance,orwhowereallowedto
startprovisionallyinspiteoflateappearance.
5.2.7. Valid and False Starts. In competitions with a fixed start interval, the
competitor must start on the start signal. The start time is valid if it occurs
within five seconds before or five seconds after the official start time. A
competitorwhodoesnotstartwithinthatspanoftimewillbedisqualified.
5.2.7.1.
Acompetitormustleavethestartwithbothfeetattachedtotheboard.
5.2.7.2. Immediately after the competition, the start referee will inform the
Referee of the start numbers and names of the competitors who made a
falsestartorhavecompromisedthestartingrules.
5.3. TheFinish
5.3.1. The finish area must be plainly visible to the competitor approaching the
finish. It must be wide, with a gentle sloped smooth out run. It must be
especiallywellpreparedandsmoothlypackedtomakestoppingeasy.
5.3.2. Thefinishareaistobecompletelyfencedin.Anyunauthorizedentrymustbe
prevented.
5.3.3. Snow walls, straw or hay bags, foam rubber or other appropriate safety
materialsshallbeusedtopreventanypossibilityofacollisionwiththefinish
structures.
5.3.4. Thefinishlineismarkedbytwopostsorverticalbannersthatareconnected
by a horizontal banner marked "finish". In GS and SBX the finish must be no
lessthan10mwide.Thepostsusedtomountthetimingdevicesmustalsobe
38
2016-2017CompetitionandRulesManual–ApprovedJanuary12,2017
2016.v.1.4
atleastasfarapartasthefinishpostsandshallbeprotectedjustascarefully
andadequatelyasthefinishposts.Thetimingpostsaretobeplaceddirectly
behindthefinishpostsorbanners,onthedownhillside.Thefinishlinemust
beclearlymarkedwithdye.
5.3.5. Withelectronictiming,thetimeistakenwhenacompetitorcrossestheline
between the finish posts with any part of his/her body or equipment and so
breaks the contact or beam. The finish line must be crossed with at least one
footattachedtotheboard.InSnowboardCrossthecompetitor'splaceoffinish
isdeterminedwhenanypartofthebodyorsnowboardcrossesthefinishline.
5.3.6. In case of a fall at the finish, the time can be taken without both of the
competitor’s feet having crossed the finish line. In this case the time is taken
when any part of the competitor's body or equipment stops the timekeeping
system. With hand timing, the time is taken when any part of the competitor
crossesthefinishline.
5.3.7. Forthistimetobecomevalid,thecompetitormustimmediatelycompletely
crossthefinishlinewithatleastonefootattachedtotheboard.
5.3.8. ElectronicTiming:Theremustbecommunication(radios)betweenthestart
and finish. Photoelectric cells are placed at such a height that a competitor
finishingnormally,cutsthebeamwiththelowerhalfofhis/herlegs,between
theankleandtheknee.
5.3.9. In case of a failure in the main electronic timing system, the results of the
backupelectronictimingwillbevalid.Utilizationoftimestakenbyhand;hand
timesmaybeusedintheofficialresultsafteracorrectionhasbeencalculated.
5.3.10.
Hand Timing. For all competitions back-up hand timing must record
the 1/10ths or 1/100ths of a second. It must be completely separate and
independentoftheelectronictimingatthestartandfinish.Thewatchesmust
besynchronizedwiththeelectronictiming.
5.3.11.
Calculation of the correction (E.E.T.): To calculate the difference
betweenthetimestakenbyhandandtheelectronictimesofthe6competitors
startingbeforethemissingtimeandthe6startingafterorifnecessarythe12
nearest competitors. The two times showing the greatest differences are
eliminated. The sum of the remaining 10 time differences is divided by 10 to
givethecorrection,whichmustbeappliedtothehandtimeofthecompetitor
withoutanelectronictime.
5.4. Results
5.4.1. Organizers shall provide appropriate facilities for continuous visual or
acousticpresentationofallregisteredtimesorscoresofallcompetitors.
5.4.2. As soon as possible after completion of the competition (race or heat in
snowboardcross),unofficialtimes,scoresanddisqualificationsshallbeposted
on the official scoreboard/notice board, and at the finish; including names of
competitors who have been disqualified and the names of officials who have
39
2016-2017CompetitionandRulesManual–ApprovedJanuary12,2017
2016.v.1.4
notedthefaultsleadingtothedisqualifications,andincludetheexacttimethe
disqualifications were posted. The time limit for protests is counted from the
momentofthisnotification.Protestsenteredlaterareconsiderednullandvoid.
5.4.3. InSnowboardCrossascoreboard/sshallbeprovidedatboththetopandthe
bottomofthecourse
5.4.4. Unofficial Results: Results shall be considered unofficial until approved by
the T.D. Unofficial results shall be posted on a scoreboard, which shall be
readily visible from the area provided for the competitors who have finished.
Whenever possible, unofficial results should be announced to the public over
loudspeakers.
5.4.5. TheChiefofcalculationsisresponsibleforquickandaccuratecalculationof
results.He/Shesupervisestheimmediateduplicationofunofficialresultsand
thepublicationofofficialresultsafterexpirationoftheprotestinterval,orafter
anyprotestshavebeendecided.
5.4.6. Allresultsaretobesubmittedseparatelyformenandwomen.Competition
resultsshallinclude:
-thenameoftheorganizingcluborassociation;
-thenameofthecompetition;
-thedateofthecompetition;
-thelocationofthecompetition;
-thetypeofcompetition(GSorSBX);
-theT.D.,GS&SBX;
-theChiefofCompetition,GS&SBX;
-theChiefofCourse,GS&SBX;
-thereferees(includingtheassistant,start,finishreferees),GS;
-theHeadJudge,SBX;
-thestartreferee,SBX;
-thenamesofalljudges,SBX;
-thestartelevation,GS;
-thefinishelevation,GS;
-theverticaldrop,GS;
-thenumberofgates,GS;
-thecoursesetters(foreachrun),GS;
-thelengthofthecourse,SBX;
-thedegreeofinclinationofthecourse,SBX;
40
2016-2017CompetitionandRulesManual–ApprovedJanuary12,2017
2016.v.1.4
-thewidthofthecourse,SBX;
-theheightofthecourse,SBX;
-competitor'sbibnumber;
-competitor'sname;
-competitor'sschoolname;
-firstruntime,GS;
-secondruntime,GS;
-totaltime,GS;
-competitor'splacepoint/s,SBX;
-competitionbracketing,SBX;
-USCSAteamresultsandteamtime/score,toincludethetopthreetimes
(GS)orscores(SBX)ofeachscoringmember.
5.5. JointRegulationsoftheCourse
5.5.1. AllcoursesmustcomplywithstandardssetbyUSCSA,followingtheUSASA
standards if sanctioned by USASA or following USSA and FIS if sanctioned by
USSA.
5.5.2. When visibility is poor, pine boughs or dye shall be used to spread on the
sidesofthecoursetoaidindepthperception.
5.5.3. When possible appropriate warm up slopes, closed to the public, must be
madeavailableforallcourses.
5.5.4. Onaclosedcourse,nooneexceptfortheJuryispermittedtochangegates,
flagsetc.ormodifythecoursestructure(jumps,bumps,etc.).
5.5.5. Competitorswhoenteraclosedcompetitioncourseattimesotherthanthose
published by the Jury may be disqualified. Trainers, servicemen, coaches etc.
who are allowed on a closed competition course are to be determined by the
Jury.
5.5.6. Gates (alpine events): All poles used in the alpine events are divided into
rigidpolesandflexpoles.
5.5.6.1. Rigid Poles: Round, uniform poles with a diameter between 25 mm
and32mm,withoutjoints,areallowedasrigidpoles.Rigidpolesmayonly
beusedastheoutsidepoleofaslalomgateandthenon-impactpoleofa
GSgatesystemwithagatepanel.Theymustbeofsuchalengththat,when
set, they project at least 1.80 meters out of the snow and they must be
madeofanon-splinteringmaterial.
5.5.6.2. FlexPoles:Flexpolesmustconformtotherigidpolespecificationsbut
arefittedwithaspring-loadedhinge.
41
2016-2017CompetitionandRulesManual–ApprovedJanuary12,2017
2016.v.1.4
5.5.6.3. StubbyPoles:Stubbypolesareflexpoleswithnotmorethan20cmof
poleabovethehinge.StubbyPolesmaybeusedforParallelevents.
5.5.7. TheChiefofCoursemustprovideenoughofthefollowing:
-blueandredslalompoles;
-acorrespondingnumberofflags,dividedbycolors;
-sledgehammers,crowbars,drills,wedges,etc.
-gatenumbers;
-sparepoles;
-anddyeformarkingthepositionofthepoles.
5.5.8. Marking Gates: The positions of the gate poles are to be marked with an
easily recognizable coloring substance that remains visible throughout the
entirerace.
5.5.9. Numbering Gates: The gates must be numbered from top to bottom of the
course and the numbers attached to the outside pole. Start and finish are not
counted.
5.6. ProtestsConcerningSnowboardEvents
5.6.1. Protests shall be submitted in accordance with section and formatted as
followsforalleventsinthisdiscipline.Allprotestsmustbegiveninwritingby
ateamofficerorcoachtoavotingmemberofthejury,unlessnotedotherwise
below, and be accompanied by a cash deposit. For Regional and National
events, the deposit is $50.00 for all protests submitted in this discipline. The
deposit will be refunded if the protest is upheld. Such protests must be
received in the time periods as noted below or will not be considered. The
depositmaybewaivedatconferencelevelevents.
5.6.2. Nocompetitor,coach,teamofficer,orspectatorwillbeallowedtoapproach
thejudge’sareaandtalktothejudgesduringanycompetition.
5.6.3. ProtestsConcerningtheCourse:Obstacles,dangerpoints,visibility,etc.,must
bepresentedgiveninwriting,byateamofficertotheChiefofCompetition60
minutespriortothestartoftheanycompetition.
5.6.4. Protests During the Competition: A team officer who protests against any
actionbyanothercompetitororanofficialduringthecompetitionmustsubmit
his/her protest to the Referee or any other member of the jury within 15
minutesaftertheendingofthecompetition.Protestsaretobesubmittedatthe
location designated on the official notice board or at a place announced at a
teamcaptain’smeeting.ForSnowboardCross,beforethenextheatbegins.
5.6.5. Protests concerning Disqualification’s, Timing: A Protest against
disqualification’s or timing must presented be given in writing, by a team
officertoavotingmemberofthejuryandbeaccompaniedbyacashdeposit;
for Regionals and Nationals the deposit is $50.00. Such protest must be
42
2016-2017CompetitionandRulesManual–ApprovedJanuary12,2017
2016.v.1.4
received within 15 minutes of the posting of a disqualification or unofficial
time. The deposit will be refunded if the protest is upheld. (The $25 deposit
requirement may be waived at conference level competitions.) In Snowboard
Crosstheprotestmustbesubmittedbeforethenextraceorheatbegins)or,at
the latest, within 15 minutes after the announcement of the disqualification
andthatprotestsenteredafterthisareconsiderednullandvoid.InSnowboard
Cross it can be decided that protests can be delivered verbally/orally to the
referee.Theteamcaptainsmustbein-formedbeforehand.
5.6.6. ProtestsConcerningFalseCalculationandClericalErrors:Acomplaint,based
notonanallegedbreachoftherulesonthepartofanofficialorcompetitor,but
onanallegederrorin,calculatingtheresults,shallbeconsideredifitissentby,
ateamofficerviaregisteredlettertotheRaceCommitteewithinonemonthof
thedateofthecompetition.Ifthemistakeisprovencorrectlistsofresultsshall
bepublished.
5.6.7. Snowboard Cross: Protests/DSQ’s. Disqualifications will be announced
and/orpostedimmediatelyaftereachheatatadesignatedareaatthebottom
and top of the course. All protests must be reported to the Chief of Finish
before the next heat begins. Protests may be submitted by the affected
competitororteamofficer,butmustbesubmittedpriortotheaffectedathlete’s
departure of the finish corral. Protests can be delivered verbally / orally
initiallytotheFinishRefereeifacceptabletothejury,butmustbefollowedby
awrittenstatement.Theprotestfeemustbepaidatorbeforetheconclusionof
thecompetition.
5.6.8. ExaminationofProtests
5.6.8.1. The Jury meets to deal with the protests under its jurisdiction at a
time predetermined by the Jury and publicly announced on the official
noticeboard.Thisisasettimefollowingthepostingofdisqualificationsor
unofficialresults,whicheverofthesepostingsoccurslater.
5.6.8.2. In dealing with a protest against disqualifications, the gate judge in
question(and,ifneedbe,thegatejudgeoftheadjacentgatecombinations
orotherinvolvedofficials),thecompetitorinquestion,andtheprotesting
team officer shall be invited to attend. Further, the requested additional
evidencesuchasvideotape,photos,movies,etc.shouldbechecked.
5.6.8.3. At the vote on the protest, only the jury members are to be present.
TheTechnicalDelegatechairstheproceedings.Minutesaretobekeptand
signed by the Technical Delegate. The decision requires a majority of all
membersnamedtotheJury,notjustofthosepresent.Incaseofatievote,
theTechnicalDelegate'svoteisdecisive.Thedecisionistobemadepublic
immediatelyaftertheproceedingsbypostingontheofficialnoticeboard
withnotationofthepostingtime.InSnowboardCrossthedecisionmaybe
announcedorally.
5.6.9. Appeals
43
2016-2017CompetitionandRulesManual–ApprovedJanuary12,2017
2016.v.1.4
5.6.9.1. Appeals against Jury decisions are to be submitted within 24 hours
after their publication. Appeals against the official results are to be
submittedwithin14daysto:
5.6.9.1.1.
TheConferenceAppealsBoard(ConferenceCompetitions)
5.6.9.1.2.
TheRegionalAppealsBoard(RegionalCompetitions)
5.6.9.1.3.
TheUSCSACompetition/RulesCommittee(NationalEvents)
5.6.9.1.4.
5.6.9.2. The USCSA Competition and Rules Committee shall hear all protests
regarding national events. Any member of the USCSA Competition and
RulesCommitteewhomayhaveservedonthejurybeingprotested,orare
representativesofschoolsinvolvedtherein,shallbedisqualifiedfromthe
deliberationsonthatissue.
5.6.9.3. The appeal, in writing and with substantiating particulars, must
alwaysbesubmittedtotheappropriateappealsboard,ormailedthereto
within 14 days after the announcement of the previous decision on the
protests(notcountingtheannouncementday).
5.7. CancellationofACompetition
5.7.1. The Jury has the right to cancel a competition if the safety of the
competitorsisendangeredoriftheproperconductofthecompetitioncannot
beguaranteed.
5.7.2. If,however,aprotestislodgedwiththeappropriateappealboardandupheld
by that board within 24 hours after cancellation of the race the whole
competitionmustberunagain.Ifthereisnoprotest,theraceiscanceled.
5.8. GiantSlalom(GS)
5.8.1. A giant slalom is a race in which the competitors must follow a course
through control gates. A giant slalom should always be decided by two runs.
The gates must be reset for the second run. Whenever possible, both runs
shouldbeheldonthesameday.
5.8.2. InspectionOfTheCourse
5.8.2.1. The course will remain closed for training on the day of the
competition. The gates must be finally set at least one hour before the
start.
5.8.2.2. Competitors are allowed to study/inspect the course after its final
setting, by slowly sliding down alongside the course. (Method to be
determined by Competition Jury). Riding through a gate or practicing
turns parallel to those required by gates on the course will lead to
disqualification. Competitors are not allowed to touch (hold) the gates
duringinspection.Firstoffenceispenalizedbyawarning,secondoffense
by a disqualification. Competitors must wear their start numbers so that
theyareeasilyvisible.
44
2016-2017CompetitionandRulesManual–ApprovedJanuary12,2017
2016.v.1.4
5.8.3. OtherRegulations
5.8.3.1. Markingchanges(suchasshort-cutsforinstance)onaclosedcourse
is forbidden. A competitor benefiting from such changes shall be
disqualified.
5.8.3.2. No competitor is allowed to go up or down a closed course with or
withouthisorherboard.
5.8.3.3.
Helmetsarerequiredforparticipationingiantslalomevents.(509)
5.8.3.4. The Competition Committee must provide the required number of
forerunnersforthegivenconditions.Normally,atleastthreeforerunners
mustbeavailabletoopentherace.Forerunnersmustcommandsufficient
skiingabilitytocoverthecourseinracingfashion.Inunusualconditions,
the Jury may increase the number of forerunners accordingly. The
forerunners must be recognizable as such, and must wear forerunners
startnumbers(bibs).Thetimesoftheforerunnersmaynotbeannounced,
orotherwisemadepublic.
5.8.3.5. Forerunners are not allowed to inform competitors about snow
conditionsonthecourse.Uponrequest,theforerunnersshallreporttothe
membersoftheJuryregardingsnowconditions,thevisibilityandtherace
line.
5.8.3.6. Competitorsdisqualifiedinthefirstrunarenotpermittedtostartas
forerunners in the second run. Competitors suspended for disciplinary
reasonscannotbenamedasforerunners.
5.8.4. TechnicalData
5.8.4.1. The Gates: A Giant Slalom gate consists of one long slalom pole and
onestubbypoleandonebanner.Consecutivegatesmustalternateincolor
exceptbanana/delaygates,whichmustbethesamecolorgatesandflags.
Theslalompolesmustcarrytriangularbannersmatchingthecolorofthe
pole. The turning pole must be a "Stubby" pole 45 cm. The outside pole
mustbearigidpole.
5.8.4.1.1.
Triangular banner/gate flag: Height long side 110 cm, Height
short side 10-20 cm, Base length 130 cm. Triangular banners are
fastenedbetweenthepolessotheloweredgeofthebannerisonthe
snow.
5.8.4.1.2.
Stubby flex pole: Length above snow 45 cm (from bottom of
hingetotopend),Softpadding35cm,Baselength25cm.Thehinge
shouldbeassoftaspossible.
5.8.4.1.3.
Thetriangularbannershavetobeplacedatrightangles(90°)
to the fall line at the bottom of the gate. The distance between the
nearestpolesoftwosuccessivegatesmustnotbelessthan10m.The
gatesmustbesetsothatthecompetitorscandistinguishthemclearly
45
2016-2017CompetitionandRulesManual–ApprovedJanuary12,2017
2016.v.1.4
andquicklyevenathighspeed.Thebannerofagateshouldbesetat
rightanglestotheracingline.
5.8.4.2.
TheCourse.SettingoftheGiantSlalom
5.8.4.2.1.
12-16% of the vertical drop in meters = number of turns by
roundingupordownofthedecimals.Itisrecommendedtosetwitha
distance of between 25-30 meters between turning gates in GS
(exception: bananas). The terrain should preferably be undulating
andhilly.Thecoursemustbeatleast30mwide.
5.8.4.2.2.
Course Description and Setting. In setting a giant slalom the
followingprinciplesshouldbeobserved:Gatesmustbefinallysetat
least one hour before the start of competition. Both runs can be set
onthesamecoursebutthesecondrunmustbere-set.
5.8.4.2.3.
Theskillfuluseofthegroundwhensettingagiantslalomis,in
mostcases,evenmoreimportantthanforaslalom,sincefiguresplay
alessimportantroleowingtotheprescribedwidthofthegatesand
the greater distances between them. It is therefore better to set
mainly single gates, while exploiting the ground to the utmost.
Figurescanbeset,butmainlyonuninterestingterrain.
5.8.4.2.4.
A Giant Slalom should present a variety of long, medium and
small turns. The competitor should be free to choose his own line
between the gates, which must not be set down the fall-line of the
slope.Thefullwidthofahillshouldbeusedwhereverpossible.The
course should be set "symmetrically" not to favor goofy or regular
riders.
5.9. SnowboardCross(SBX)
5.9.1. A Snowboard Cross is a competition where, depending on the number of
athletesinarace,clusteratthestartinglinetogether,andsimultaneouslyride
downaslopestuddedwithvariousobstacles.Thefirsttwotocrossthefinish
line qualify for the next round of competition in this elimination format. The
numberofridersperroundwillbedecidedatthecoachesmeeting.
5.9.2. Inspection/TrainingofTheCourse
5.9.2.1. The Jury decides the method of inspection. The competitors are
allowedtoinspectthecoursebyslowlyslidingdownthroughoralongside
the course. Inspection times are at the discretion of the race Jury but
should be a minimum of 30 minutes. Competitors must carry their start
numbersandweartheirhelmets.
5.9.2.2. Trainingtimesoropenrunningofthecourseisatthediscretionofthe
race Jury but should be at least 30 minutes to allow all competitors the
opportunitytoridethroughthecourseaminimumofonetimebeforethe
officialstartofthecompetition.
46
2016-2017CompetitionandRulesManual–ApprovedJanuary12,2017
2016.v.1.4
5.9.2.3. The setting of the gates must be done before the official training.
Minoradjustmentsinthesettingmaybenecessaryduringthetrainingto
adjust the course for a smooth race line. Any changes made during
training should be announced in the start area so all competitors and
TeamCaptainsareawareofsuchchanges.
5.9.3. ExecutionofSnowboardCross
5.9.3.1. Formats are depending on the size of the field, 4-riders per heat, 6ridersperheat,orsuchothernumberasdeterminedbytheJuryforsafe
competition.Timetrialswillbeconductedtoseedandqualifyridersinto
thefinalcompetition.Eventorganizerorjurymayhavetheoptiontousea
bestoneoutoftwotimedtrials.
5.9.3.2. Any team that has seeded more than 5 athletes for the competition
will only be allowed to have their top 5 competitors advance to the
bracketedrounds(ref7.07).Athletesdisplacedbyateamwithmorethan
5athletesinthetimetrialwillbeusedtofilltheremainingopenpositions
in the bracketed rounds. All athletes completing a time trial and not
advancing to the finals shall be reordered according to their time trial
resultsandplacedoutbeginningthenextnumericalplacebeyondthosein
thebrackets.
5.9.4. TechnicalData
5.9.4.1. CoursesforallSBXmustbeaminimumof100metersandamaximum
of300metersinverticaldrop.Averageslopeinclinationshouldbe15-18
degrees. The course should not include sections where gradients exceed
morethan25degreesforlengthsof45metersormore.
5.9.4.2. Gate Description: A SBX gate consists of one long slalom pole, one
stubbypoleandonetriangularbanner.Consecutivegatesmustalternate
in color (except banana’s/delay gates). The slalom poles must carry
triangularbannersmatchingthecolorofthepole.
5.9.4.3. Triangularbannersmustbeused.Theturningpolemustbeastubby
pole.ThetriangularbannersizemaybeeitherSlalomorGiantSlalom.Itis
recommendedtousetheGiantSlalomsizewheneverpossible.Triangular
bannersmustbeplacedatthebottomofthegate.
5.9.4.4. The gates must be set so that the competitors can distinguish them
clearlyandquicklyevenathighspeeds.Thebannerofagateshouldbeset
atrightanglestothecompetitionline.Incertaincircumstancesridersmay
be required to pass between two gates of the same colors (for example:
corridors).
5.9.4.5. Generalcharacteristicsofthecourses.Theslopeshouldpreferablybe
of a medium pitch (not flat/not steep-ideally 15-18 degrees) with varied
terrain. The SBX slope must be a minimum of 30 m wide. Under certain
conditions for short sections (50 m or less) the course width may be a
minimumof10m.
47
2016-2017CompetitionandRulesManual–ApprovedJanuary12,2017
2016.v.1.4
5.9.4.5.1.
TheidealSBXslopeallowsfortheconstructionofallorsome
of the following terrain features: Banks (crescent shaped), Double
Banks,Single,Double,orTripleJumps,OllieJumps,Rollsandwaves-
(Single, double, triple, etc.), Staircase Jumps, Spines and double
spines, Pro style jumps, Obelisk or pyramids, Tabletop jumps, and
MediumorlongGStypeturns.
5.9.4.5.2.
Other terrain features can be built but safety considerations
must always be a priority. Gap jumps are not permitted under any
circumstances.
5.9.4.5.3.
The ideal SBX course should be technically challenging,
consistingoffeaturessuitedtotheterrainlinkedbygatestocontrol
speedbuttestingthewidestvarietyofsnowboardtechnique.
5.9.4.5.4.
It is recommended that gates not be set in the absence of a
feature.
5.9.4.6. Thefinishmustbenolessthan15meterswide.Inexceptionalcases,
theT.D.canonlydecreasethisdistancefortechnicalreasonsorbecauseof
the terrain. The width of the finish is considered to be the distance
betweenthetwofinishpostsofbanners.
5.9.4.7. CoursePreparation:Thetrackshouldbeclosedtothepublicatleast
20 hours before the training. Terrain features and jumps must be built
with sufficient time so that the snow has been compacted to insure that
theycanbeproperlymaintainedduringtrainingandcompetition.Theuse
of artificial means is permitted (salt, water, etc.). In places where the
riders may be in danger, protections (willy bags, mattresses, nets, etc.)
mustbeinstalled.
5.9.5. CourseSetting
5.9.5.1. Thesettingofthegatesmustbedonebeforetheofficialtrainingand
should incorporate the skillful use of the terrain with the integration of
terrain features and jumps into the setting. Minor adjustments in the
setting may be necessary during the training to adjust the course for a
smoothraceline.Anychangesmadeduringtrainingshouldbeannounced
inthestartareasoallcompetitorsandTeamCaptainsareawareofsuch
changes.
5.9.5.2. The total number of terrain features and jumps should be at the
discretion of the course designer but will incorporate as many different
possibilitiesasispractical.Blindjumpsorterrainfeatureswherearideris
unabletoseethelandingfromthetake-offshouldbeavoided.Thecourse
shouldbedesignedsoastoseparatetheridersasquicklyaspossibleafter
thestart(i.e.3-5rolls,mogulsorotherterrainfeaturesbetweenthestart
and the first turn). These terrain features should be placed in a straight
line from the start to the first turn. Minimum distance of the straight
48
2016-2017CompetitionandRulesManual–ApprovedJanuary12,2017
2016.v.1.4
section of the course between the start and the first turn should be 50
meters.Thestartshouldberelativelyflat(12-14°).
5.9.6. SixRiderFormat
Qualifier#1:Toptwofinishersineachheatadvancetothenextround.
QuarterFinal:
4heatsof6.Top3ridersadvancetoSemi-Finals.
SemiFinal:2heatsof6.Top3ridersadvancetotheFinals.4-6fromeach
heatadvancetoConsolations.
ConsolationRound:1heatof6.Determinesfinalrank7-12.FinalRound:1
heatof6.Determinesfinalrank1-6.
Rank of all riders in the final round will be determined by head to head
competition.Ridersnotqualifiedforthefinalwillberankedaccordingto
qualifyingtimes.
5.9.7. FourRiderFormat
Qualifier#1:Top2finisher(s)ineachheatadvancetothenextround.
QuarterFinal:
4heatsof4.Top2ridersadvancetoSemi-Finals.
SemiFinal:2 heats of 4. Top 2 riders advance to the Finals. 3 & 4 from
eachheatadvancetoConsolations.
ConsolationRound:1heatof4.Determinesfinalrank5-8.FinalRound:1
heatof4.Determinesfinalrank1-4.
Rank of all riders in the final round will be determined by head to head
competition.Ridersnotqualifiedforthefinalwillberankedaccordingto
qualifyingtimes.
5.9.8. SBXPairings
Shouldconditionsexistornumbersofcompetitorsexceedthebracketsize
available to safely execute a race per Section 5.9.6 and 5.9.7 above, the
competitionformatwillbeclearlydefinedatthecaptains/ridersmeeting
bythejury.
Pairingsforthebracketedfinalroundswillbeaccordingtothefollowing:
Rankingfor8heats/4perheat(32)
Heat
49
#
1st
Position
2nd
Position
3rd
Position
4th
Position
1
1
16
24
32
2016-2017CompetitionandRulesManual–ApprovedJanuary12,2017
2016.v.1.4
2
8
9
17
25
3
6
11
19
27
4
4
13
21
29
5
3
14
22
30
6
5
12
20
28
7
7
10
18
26
8
2
15
23
31
Heat
#
1st
Position
2nd
Position
3rd
Position
4th
Position
1
1
8
12
16
2
4
5
9
13
3
3
6
10
14
4
2
7
11
15
Heat
#
1st
Position
2nd
Position
3rd
Position
4th
Position
5th
Position
6th
Position
1
1
16
24
32
40
48
2
8
9
17
25
33
41
3
6
11
19
27
35
43
4
4
13
21
29
37
45
5
3
14
22
30
38
46
6
5
12
20
28
36
44
7
7
10
18
26
34
42
8
2
15
23
31
39
47
Heat
#
1st
Position
2nd
Position
3rd
Position
4th
Position
5th
Position
6th
Position
1
1
8
12
16
20
24
2
4
5
9
13
17
21
3
3
6
10
14
18
22
50
2016-2017CompetitionandRulesManual–ApprovedJanuary12,2017
2016.v.1.4
4
2
7
11
15
19
23
5.9.9. TheStart
5.9.9.1. Thelanepositionisbasedoffqualifyingtime.Firstofthequalification
can chose their lane, the second fastest the next lane and so on in each
heat.Amissedstartisadisqualification.Itistherider'sresponsibilityto
arriveatthestartintimetoCompete.
5.9.9.2. For each heat the competitors choose their lane in order of their
qualifyingtime.
5.9.9.3. Startlanes.Eachstartingpositionisidentifiedbyanumber.Looking
downthecoursethepositionsaresetfromlefttoright.(Position1isvery
leftlookingdownhill-Position4/6isveryrightlookingdownhill)
5.9.10.
Contact.Intentionalcontactbypushing,pullingorothermeans,which
causesanothercompetitortoslowdown,fallorexitthecourse,isnotallowed
and is an automatic disqualification. Unavoidable "casual contact" may be
acceptable.Allcontactinfractionswillbeatthediscretionofthecoursejudges
andraceJury.
5.9.11.
Disqualifications/Protests
5.9.11.1. Disqualificationswillbeannouncedand/orpostedimmediatelyafter
eachheatatadesignatedareaatthebottomandtopofthecourse.
5.9.11.2. All protests must be reported to the Chief of Finish before the next
heat begins (prior to the competitors leaving the finish corral). Protests
afterthistimewillnotbeaccepted.Protestsneednotbeinwritingbutall
other rules for protests will apply. The Jury will consist of the T.D., Race
Director or Chief of Competition and the Chief of Finish. The protest fee
mustbepaidbeforetheconclusionofthecompetition.
5.9.11.3. GateJudges.Between4-8GateJudges(withradiosconnectedwiththe
finish-referee) on a SBX are necessary. They must be familiar with the
rules(Inspection,Training,Gate-DQ´sandContactetc.).
5.9.12.
Equipment
5.9.12.1. NosquaretailboardswillbeallowedintheSBXcourse.
5.10. JointRegulationsForGiantSlalom,SnowboardCross
5.10.1.
Seeding
5.10.1.1. Participating full teams shall have one competitor placed in each of
the 5 seeds. The order of teams shall be generated by random selection
withineachseed.Thereshallbeseparatedrawsforbothgiantslalomand
51
2016-2017CompetitionandRulesManual–ApprovedJanuary12,2017
2016.v.1.4
snowboard cross time trials. All random selection draws by heat will be
processed electronically with software that produces the daily seeds
based on randomizing each heat individually, without bias to a specific
team.(SeeAlpineRulesSection3.3.3forRandomDrawProcedures.)
5.10.1.2. The seeding of outstanding individual competitors (Regional’s and
Nationals)forgiantslalomandsnowboardcrosstimetrialsshallbeplaced
between the first and second seed. The random selection of these
individual representatives shall be determined by draw at the seeding
meeting. (If the number of outstanding individual competitors outnumbertheteams,theywillbeseededintheteammanner.)
5.10.1.3. Special Snowboard Cross Seeding: Times from the Time Trails are
usedtoplaceracersinheats.Ifpossible,noathletesfromthesameteam
shallbeinthesame1stroundofheats.
5.10.1.4. BIBO. The BIBO method of seeding shall be used for giant slalom
competition. BIBO seeding is used in the second run of giant slalom
events,andconsistsofreversingtheorderofthefirst30finishers,orthe
numberofteamscompeting,whicheverisless,fromthefirstrunandthen
proceeding in time and place order through the rest of the first run
finishers.Intheeventtherearefewerthan30butmorethan15finishers,
thefirst15finisherswillbereversedforthesecondrun.Intheeventthere
are fewer than 15 finishers, the first 5 finishers will be reversed for the
secondrun.Iftwoormorecompetitorshavethesametimeorsamescore,
thecompetitorwiththegreatestnumberofseedpointswillbelistedfirst
on the first run results. If it is not a point race, the competitor with the
lowestbibnumberwillbelistedfirst,thereforewillstartbeforetheother
competitorinthesecondrun.
5.10.1.5. Seeding for the second run of alternate competitors shall be at the
discretionoftheChiefofCompetition,tobeannouncedpriortotheevent.
5.10.2.
Reruns
5.10.2.1. A competitor who is hindered during competition by the error of an
official,byaspectator,byananimal,orbyanyotherjustifiablecausescan
apply to any member of the Jury for a rerun immediately after the
occurrence of the interference. The team captain of the hindered
competitor can also make this claim. The competitor must leave the
courseimmediatelyaftertheinterferenceandmaynotridefurtherdown
thecourse.(Doesnotapplyinsnowboardcross.)
5.10.2.2. GroundsforInterference:
5.10.2.2.1. Blockingofthecoursebyanofficial,aspectator,ananimal,or
otherhindrance.
5.10.2.2.2. Blockingofthecoursebyafallencompetitor,whodidnotclear
thecoursesoonenough.(Doesnotapplyinsnowboardcross.)
52
2016-2017CompetitionandRulesManual–ApprovedJanuary12,2017
2016.v.1.4
5.10.2.2.3. Objects in the course such as equipment of a previous
competitor.(Doesnotapplyinsnowboardcross.)
5.10.2.2.4.
Activitiesofthefirstaidservicewhichhinderthecompetitor.
5.10.2.2.5. Absenceofagateknockeddownbyapreviouscompetitor,and
notpromptlyreplaced.(Doesnotapplyinsnowboardcross.)
5.10.2.2.6. Malfunction of the scoring system. Other similar incidents,
whichbeyondthewillandcontrolofthecompetitor,causesignificant
lossofspeedoraffectthecompetitor'sperformance.(Doesnotapply
insnowboardcross.)
5.10.2.2.7. Competitors who continue after an interference will lose the
righttoclaimarerun.(Doesnotapplyinsnowboardcross.)
5.10.2.3. If the competitor's explanation appears credible, a re-run shall be
grantedonconditionthatthereasonforitislaterconfirmedbytheJury.If
the competitor was already disqualified before the incident entitling
him/hertore-run,there-runisnotvalid.IncasetheRefereeorotherJury
membersareunabletoimmediatelyquestiontheappropriateofficialsto
judge the justification for the re-run, he/she may, to avoid delay for the
competitor,grantaprovisionalre-run.Thisre-runwillbevalidonlyifitis
confirmed by the Jury. The provisionally or definitively approved re-run
remainsvalidifitprovesslowerthanthefirst(original)run.Iftheclaim
forre-runisshowntobeunjustified,thecompetitorisdisqualified.
5.10.2.4. Re-runsshouldnotbegivenlightly.Jurymembersshouldpayspecial
attention of items in 7.02. After a competitor has already fallen or
otherwisedelayedhis/herrunsignificantly,he/shemaynotexpectarerunforthelossofafewadditionalsecondsduetoatardyreplyofagate
judgeorsimilarminordelay.Asaguideline,verycarefulscrutinymustbe
used whenever a re-run is requested after that competitor has already
delayedthemselvesthroughhis/hererror.
5.10.2.5. Start Time of Rerun. The competitor may start after he/she has
reportedtothestartreferee,atthestartreferee'sdiscretion.
5.10.3.
ClothingandEquipment
5.10.3.1. Safetyleashesareoptionalunlessrequiredbytheorganizerortheski
area.
5.10.3.2. Snowboardsmusthaveaminimumwidthasdescribed:
5.10.3.2.1.
GlidingSurface:MinimumWidthupto135cm–14cm
5.10.3.2.2.
GlidingSurface:MinimumWidthmorethan135cm–16cm
5.10.3.3. Bindingsmustbefixeddiagonallyonthelongaxisoftheboard.Boots
cannotoverlapeachother.
5.10.3.4. Competitorsarenotallowedtouseanykindofdevicetoadditionally
supporttheirbalanceorreduceoracceleratetheirspeed.
53
2016-2017CompetitionandRulesManual–ApprovedJanuary12,2017
2016.v.1.4
5.11. RulesSpecifictoParallelEvents
5.11.1.
Technical Data. The parallel is a competition where two competitors
ridesimultaneouslysidebysidedowntwocourses.Thesettingofthecourses,
the configuration of the ground and the preparation of the snow are to be as
identicalaspossible.
5.11.2.
Vertical Drop. Parallel slalom courses must be a minimum of 80
metersandamaximumof120metersinlength.I
§
In general the course should be between 17-22 degrees average in
steepness.
§
Recommendeddistancebetweengatesshouldbe11to13meters.
§
Parallelgiantslalomcoursesmustbeaminimumof120metersanda
maximumof200meters.
§
The parallel giant slalom has to be set as follows: 11-15% of the
vertical drop in meters = number of turns by rounding up or down
intothenearestdecimalnumber.
§
Therecommendeddistancebetweengatesshouldbe20to25meters.
5.11.3.
TheGates.SlalomgatesshouldbeusedforPSL,andGSgatesforPGS.
If necessary, GS gates may be used for both PSL and PGS courses. Poles to be
usedmustbehingedatsnowlevel.
5.11.4.
ParallelCourse.
5.11.4.1. Description.Chooseaslopewideenoughfortwocourses,preferably
slightly concave. The terrain variations must be the same across the
surfaceoftheslope.Thecoursemusthavethesameprofileandthesame
difficulties. Over the full width of the chosen slope, the snow must be
consistent,soitispossibletoofferequalconditionsonbothcourses.The
coursesmustbeentirelyclosedoffbyfence,flaggingorrope.
5.11.4.2. CourseSetting.
5.11.4.2.1. Whenthetwocoursesareset,theleftcourse(lookingfromthe
top) will be set with red gate poles and red gate flags and the right
coursewillbesetwithbluepolesandbluegateflags.
5.11.4.2.2. The same course setter establishes both courses and makes
suretheyareidenticalandparallel.Thesettermustinsurethecourse
flowissmoothandthereisavarietyintheturnshapeandthecourse
causes changes in rhythm. In no case should a parallel competition
resemblealongstraightrunfromtoptobottom.Itispermittedtoset
doubleandtriplecombinations.Recommendednumberofgatesfora
PSLare25to32.
54
2016-2017CompetitionandRulesManual–ApprovedJanuary12,2017
2016.v.1.4
5.11.4.2.3. The first gate must be placed no less than 8 meters and no
more than 10 meters from the start. The distance between each
course (from turning pole to turning pole) must be no less than 5
metersandnomorethan8metersforPSLandnolessthan7meters
andnomorethan12metersforPGS.
5.11.4.2.4. Shortly before the finish line, and after the last gate, the
separation between the two courses must be well defined so that
they direct the competitor toward the finish line. The course setter
must place the last gate in such a manner that the competitors are
guidedtowardsthecenterofeachfinishline.
5.11.5.
CompetitorInspection
5.11.5.1. The course must be in perfect condition from the time the
competitors'inspectionstartsuntilitends.
5.11.5.2. Courseworkersmustnotdisturbcompetitorsduringtheinspection.
5.11.5.3. Competitorsmustweartheirbibsduringinspection.
5.11.5.4. Competitors may not ride down the prepared course or through the
gates.
5.11.5.5. Competitors are not permitted to enter the course without being
attachedtotheirboard.
5.11.5.6. Competitorsarenotallowedto"shadowride"thecourse.
5.11.5.7. DuringFinalsridersareallowedaminimumof10minutestoinspect
theparallelcoursesbyslidingdownoncefromtoptobottomonthesides.
5.11.6.
TheStart
5.11.6.1. Twoseparatestartgateswillbeused,oneforeachcourse,eachwith
separatestartwands.
5.11.6.2. The distance between the starting gates must be no less than 4
meters.
5.11.6.3. The start gates must open simultaneously and it must be impossible
foracompetitortoopenthegatehim/herself.
5.11.6.4. The T.D. and the starter together control the start. In order to
coordinatetheirfunction,theT.D.shouldhaveaplatformsetbetweenthe
twostartgateseitherinfrontorbehindsotheentireracecourseisvisible.
5.11.6.5. The start signal can only be given after the T.D. has given the
competitorspermissiontostart.Anystartingsystemcanbeusedprovided
thesystemguaranteesasimultaneousstart.
5.11.6.6. StartIntervals:Thestarttakesplaceatirregularintervals.TheChiefof
Timing and Calculations or their assistant tells the starter when each
competitor should start. The competitor on course need not cross the
finishbeforethenextcompetitorstarts.
55
2016-2017CompetitionandRulesManual–ApprovedJanuary12,2017
2016.v.1.4
5.11.6.7. Start Signal: The start command which shall be given is "Red course
ready?", "Blue course ready?", "Racers ready?", "Go". Both competitors
shouldleavethestartgateon"Go".
5.11.6.8. FalseStarts:Disqualificationwilltakeplaceif:
5.11.6.8.1.
Acompetitormanipulatesthestartinggate.
5.11.6.8.2. Acompetitoristryingtopassthestartinggatebeforethestart
signalhasbeengiven.
5.11.7.
TheFinish
5.11.7.1. The finish area must be symmetrical. The line of the finish must be
parallelwiththelineofthestart.
5.11.7.2. Eachfinishlineismarkedbytwopolesconnectedbyabanner,which
formsthefinish.Eachfinishmustbeatleast8meterswide.
5.11.7.3. The finish lines are separated by a post or vertical banner with a
maximumwidthof1meter.
5.11.7.4. For safety reasons, it is necessary to set up virtually separate finish
approachesandexits.
5.11.7.5. ExecutionofParallelEventsonTwoCourses
5.11.7.6. Each match between two competitors consists of two runs, the two
competitorschangecoursesforthesecondrun.
5.11.8.
Qualification
5.11.8.1. Aseparatequalifyingrunhastobeset.Thisrunmustbesimilartothe
Parallelcourses,(i.e.numberofgates,fallline,inclination).Allridersget
onerunonthiscourse.
5.11.8.2. The top 16 men and women, in cases where there are less than 50
riders only 8, will take part in the parallel finals. If time allows, the jury
may permit 16 M/W to compete in the finals. This must be announced a
minimumofonehourbeforethestartofqualifications.
5.11.9.
ParallelFinals
5.11.9.1. 8respective(4pairs)areformedasfollowsusingtheresultsfromthe
Qualifications.
5.11.9.1.1.
8Pairs
Place1-Place16
Place8-Place9
Place5-Place12
Place4-Place13
Place3-Place14
56
2016-2017CompetitionandRulesManual–ApprovedJanuary12,2017
2016.v.1.4
Place6-Place11
Place7-Place10
Place2-Place15
5.11.9.1.2.
4Paris
Place1-Place8
Place4-Place5
Place3-Place6
Place2-Place7
5.11.9.2. Each pair of competitors has to make two runs. The competitors
changecoursesforthesecondrun.Acompetitor,whodoesnotfinishoris
disqualifiedinthefirstrun,startsthesecondrunwitha5%penalty.(See
9.11)
5.11.9.3. Foreachpairthecompetitorwhichislistedontopofthepairingwill
dohisfirstrunontheredcourse.
5.11.9.4. StartOrder(16men,8women)followingtheorderinthetable,from
the top to bottom, all groups race in succession. For the second run the
competitors change course. The same system is used for all elimination
rounds.
5.11.9.5. Place 5 to 8 and 9 to 16 are determined by the times of the
qualification run (runs). This process continues according to the ladder
untilawinneremerges.
5.11.9.6. The four remaining riders start according the rounds 7 - 18. The
losersoftheeliminationrounds7-10racetheirfirstrunforthe3rdand
4thpositionsbeforethefinalistsracetheirfirstrun,thenthelosersofthe
third elimination round run their second run and then the finalists run
theirfinalrace.
5.11.10.
PenaltyTimes.Thepenaltytimewillbecalculatedusingthebesttime
ofthequalificationsforwomenandmen.A5%penaltyofhistimewillbeused
intheparallelfinals.Inallcasesthemaximumtimedifferenceforthefirstrun
of each pairing can never be higher than the penalty time. i.e. the actual time
difference is 3 seconds, the penalty time is 1.5 seconds, then the second run
willbestartedwithahandicapof1.5secondsforthelosingcompetitorofthe
firstround.Ifbothcompetitorsaretiedafterthesecondrunbytheirrespective
penalty times, the competitor who wins the second run advances to the next
round.
5.11.11.
Disqualifications
5.11.11.1.Causesfordisqualifications
5.11.11.1.1. Falsestart
57
2016-2017CompetitionandRulesManual–ApprovedJanuary12,2017
2016.v.1.4
5.11.11.1.2. Changingfromonecoursetoanother
5.11.11.1.3. Disturbingtheopponent,voluntarilyornot
5.11.11.1.4. Interference
5.11.11.1.5. Incorrectgatepassage
5.11.11.1.6. Notfinishingorgoingthroughthewrongfinish.
5.11.11.2.Thecompetitor,whodoesnotfinishorisdisqualifiedinthefirstrun,
willstartinthesecondrunwithapenaltytime.
5.11.11.3.The competitor who is disqualified or gives up in the second run is
eliminated.
5.11.11.4.In case of both competitors not being able to finish, the competitor
thatpassesthemostgates:
5.11.11.4.1. Firstrun:winsthefirstrun
5.11.11.4.2. Secondrun:qualifiedforthenextround
5.11.12.
Helmets. Helmets manufactured for ski sports are required for all
competitors.
5.12. RulesSpecifictoHalfpipe
5.12.1.
TechnicalData
5.12.1.1. The Halfpipe is a channel constructed in, or of the snow. The course
should be as even and as hard as possible. The use of artificial means is
permitted(salt,water,etc.)toaidincompaction.
5.12.1.2. RecommendedHalfpipeDimensions
Minimum
Recommended
Maximum
Inclination
16degrees
18degrees
20degrees
Length
100m
110m
120m
Width
14m
15m
16m
WallHeight
3.5m
4m
4.5m
TransitionRadius
4m
5m
6m
5.12.1.3. ExactDimensions
-Vertical0.3mat85degrees
-BottomFlat5monesnowcatwidth
-DropinArea4m
-Bannerfencefromwall2m
-Outsidefencefrombanners1m
5.12.2.
58
CourseSetting
2016-2017CompetitionandRulesManual–ApprovedJanuary12,2017
2016.v.1.4
5.12.2.1. TheHalfpipecoursemustconformtospecifications.
5.12.2.2. The Halfpipe course must be finished and ready for training at least
twohoursbeforethestartofcompetition.
5.12.2.3. The drop in area shall give the riders the opportunity to enter the
Halfpipewithspeedandshallnotbeusedtoattemptamaneuver.
5.12.2.4. The lips (tops of each wall) of the Halfpipe must be clearly marked
withcolor.
5.12.2.5. NofinishlineshouldbemarkedinaHalfpipe
5.12.3.
CompetitorTraining
5.12.3.1. Competitorsarenotrequiredtotrain.
5.12.3.2. Thereshallbenospecificstartorderduringtraining.
5.12.3.3. Training times will be communicated by the competition committee
duringtheteamcaptains'meeting.
5.12.4.
TheStart
5.12.4.1. TheHeadJudgeshallcommunicatetothestarterwhenthejudgesare
readyforthenextcompetitor.
5.12.4.2. First Run: For all Halfpipe competition, the start order is as follows:
The start order for the group is created by random draw of all
competitors,withthewomenstartingfirst.(SeeAlpineRulesSection3.3.3
forRandomDrawProcedures.)
5.12.4.3. Second Run: The start order for the second run will be in the same
start order as the first. When in heats, this takes place in the same heat
rightafterthelastridergoes.Ifthereisafinalinthecompetitionthenthe
finalcompetitorswillstartinreverseorderfromtheirqualifyingscores.
5.12.4.4. Use of Heats in Halfpipe Competitions. Competitors can be run in
heatsof20-30whenappropriatebreaksoccurintheformationofthestart
list. During breaks, they would be given a 30 minute practice and then
taketheirtwoscoredruns.
5.12.4.5. Start Signal. After the starter has received acknowledgment for the
nextcompetitorfromtheHeadJudge,thestarterwillgivethecommand,
"Ready", "Go" to the competitor. The competitor may leave the start at
anytimeafterthecommand.
5.12.5.
Qualifications. Competition format will be clearly defined at the
Captains/Ridersmeetingbythejury.
5.12.6.
Helmets. Helmets manufactured for ski sports are required for all
competitorsinHalfpipecompetitionandofficialtraining.
5.12.7.
59
Judges’Stand
2016-2017CompetitionandRulesManual–ApprovedJanuary12,2017
2016.v.1.4
5.12.7.1. The minimum size of the scaffolding area must be 8 meters by 2
meters.Thejudges'viewingareashouldbeconstructedtoprovideample
roomfortheappropriatenumberofjudgesandprovideroomforviewing
andallproperamenitiesfortheoperationofthecompetition.
5.12.7.2. Thejudges'areashouldbefencedorprotectedfromcompetitorsand
spectators.
5.12.7.3. No competitor, team representative or spectator may approach the
judges'standorspeakwiththejudgesduringcompetition.
5.12.8.
JudgingandScoring
5.12.8.1. ScoringParameters
5.12.8.1.1.
OnlymaneuversperformedintheHalfpipewillbescored.
5.12.8.1.2. Each judge shall use a ten point system. Judges will score by
onesandtenths;3.8,6.7,7.3etc.
5.12.8.1.3. The score card shall be used to record the score given by the
judge.
5.12.8.1.4. A memory board shall be used by each judge to make all
necessarynotationsdepictingeachcompetitor'srun.
5.12.8.1.5. IfacompetitorlandsoutoftheHalfpipe,theyhavetenseconds
tore-enterbeforetheyaredisqualified.
5.12.8.1.6.
Eachcompetitor'sscoresmustbepostedaftereachrun.
5.12.8.2. JudgingFormat
5.12.8.2.1.
3-6judgescanbeusedatUSCSAHalfpipeevents.
5.12.8.2.2. When three judges are present there will be a total of 40
points.
5.12.8.2.2.1.
Thejudgingdutiesareasfollows:
•
One judge giving a separate score for standard airs and
rotation
•
Onejudgeforamplitude
•
OnejudgeforOI.
5.12.8.2.3. When four judges are present each judge will evaluate a
specific category, standard airs, rotations, amplitude, and overall
impressionforatotalof40points.
5.12.8.2.4. When five judges are present, three judges will evaluate and
score a specific category: standard airs, rotations, amplitude, and
therewillbetwooverallimpressionjudgesforatotalof50points.
60
2016-2017CompetitionandRulesManual–ApprovedJanuary12,2017
2016.v.1.4
5.12.8.2.5. When six judges are present, three judges will evaluate and
score a specific category: standard airs, rotations, amplitude, and
therewillbethreeoverallimpressionjudgesforatotalof60points.
5.12.8.3. Judging Criteria. The value for each run will be based on the judges'
evaluationofthefollowingcriteria.
5.12.8.3.1. StandardAirs:Theseincludeallairsortricksthatarelessthan
360degrees.Thebasickindsofstandardairsallgroupedintooneof
the following: straight airs, air to fakie/fakie to forward, alley oop
airs, straight switch stance airs, 180 hand plants and lip tricks less
than 360 degrees. In able to score a high variety, a rider should
includeamaneuverfromasmanysub-groupsaspossible.
For example, performing different backside airs with grabs shows a
good variety, but including a switch stance air, an alley oop air, and
an air to fakie, shows a much greater range of variety as well as
increasing the difficulty. Plus if the tricks are performed well, it
increasesyourscoreforexecution.
Thegrabshouldbesolidandsmooth,thelegsandbodymaneuvered
into the appropriate position, and then the grab released, all in one
fluidmotion.
Emphasis for judging will be the variety, difficulty, and execution of
tricks in the category. Falls occurring during any attempted
maneuverwithinthiscategoryshallbefactoredintothescore.
5.12.8.3.2. Rotations: These are all maneuvers that include a rotation of
360 degrees or more. Rotations can be separated into sub-groups
including horizontal rotations (720 spin), vertical rotations (back
flip),andhybrids(wetcat,inverted900).
A key point: A grabbed 540 is certainly better than a 540 without a
grab. A higher score means doing maneuvers that are more
dissimilar,suchas,a540,a720,aMcTwist,inverted7or9.Execution
forrotationsmeanssmooth,precise,andundercontrolrotating.
Higher difficulty may be added by including stalling or off axis
combinationsandaddinganextrahalforfullrotation.
Emphasis for judging will be the variety, difficulty, and execution of
tricks in the category. Falls occurring during any attempted
maneuverwithinthiscategoryshallbefactoredintothescore.
61
2016-2017CompetitionandRulesManual–ApprovedJanuary12,2017
2016.v.1.4
5.12.8.3.3. Amplitude: Measures the height of the maneuvers. Amplitude
isdistancemeasuredfromthelipofthepipetotherider'scenterof
mass.Theamplitudescoreisderivedfromthesumofallhits,divided
by the number of hits taken. The value of each hit is equal to the
number of feet between the lip of the pipe and the rider's center of
mass (either above or below the lip) added to the point value
assignedtothelip.
ThelipvalueshallbedeterminedbytheHeadJudgeandAmplitude
Judge based on observations made during practice. The purpose of
this floating value is to ensure consistency in scoring levels among
the different criteria and to have a relative value for both men and
womencompetitors.
5.12.8.3.4. Overall Impression: The OI judge is looking at how a rider
designshis/herruntoshowavarietyoftricksthatarewellexecuted
and difficult. If a rider is getting high scores from the other judges,
theywilldoequallyaswellinthiscriterion.Allphasesofeachtrick
areevaluatedbytheOIjudges.
Thejudgeswillscoretherunbyevaluatingtherun'soverallprecision
includingtheexecutionoftherunandtheroutineattempted.
Theoverallimpressionjudgeevaluatestheprecisenatureoftherun
in relation to maneuvers attempted, both individually and as a
sequenceandlooksatline,theuseofthepipe,amplitudeinrelation
tothetricksandoverallflowinthepipe.
TheoverallcompositionoftherunisthemostimportantastheO.I.
judge evaluates the sequences of tricks, the amount of risk in the
routineandtheprogressionofnewmaterialinthepipe.TheOverall
Impressionjudgedoestakefallsintoconsideration.
5.12.9.
Tie-breaking
5.12.9.1. Best of Two formats: If a tie exists, the rider with the highest score
fromtheotherrunshallbedeclaredthewinner.
5.12.9.2. IfbothrunsaretiedthenacomparisonoftheOIjudgesshallbeused.
ThecompetitorwiththehighestcombinedOIscoresfrombothrunsshall
bedeclaredthewinner.
5.12.9.3. IfalltheOIjudgesaretiedtheamplitudescoreswillbecomparedfor
bothrunsandthehighesttotalshallbedeterminedthewinner.
5.13. RulesSpecifictoSlopestyle
62
2016-2017CompetitionandRulesManual–ApprovedJanuary12,2017
2016.v.1.4
5.13.1.
CourseMeasurement
5.13.1.1. Averageslopeinclinationshouldbe12degrees
5.13.1.2. TheSlopestylecoursemustbeaminimumof30meterswide
5.13.1.3. Course for all Slopestyle must be a minimum of 150 Meters and a
maximumof200Metersinverticaldrop.
5.13.1.4. Thecourseshouldnotincludesectionswheregradientsexceedmore
than20degreesforlengthsof50metersormore.
5.13.1.5. The slope should preferably be of moderate pitch, not flat and not
steepideally10to15degrees.
5.13.2.
CourseDescription
5.13.2.1. A Slopestyle course shall contain a variety of hits, with two or more
linesthatthecompetitormaychoosetoperform.
5.13.2.2. ASlopestylecoursemusthaveaminimumofsixfeatures,notfavoring
regularorgoofyfootriders,whichshallinclude,atleast2tabletopjumps
orfunboxes,2quarterpipes,andtwootherformsofterrainparkfeatures
whichcouldincludewaves,rails,spinesorotherapprovedfeatures.
5.13.2.3. The ideal slopestyle allows for the construction of all the features to
be used both by male and female competitors. All competitors shall run
thesamecourseforofficialscoring.
5.13.2.4. Other terrain features can be built but safety considerations must
alwaysbeapriority.
5.13.2.5. The ideal Slopestyle course should be technically challenging, with a
widevarietyoffeaturesindiversecombinations.Thecoursemusthavea
smoothflowwithabalanceoffeatures,andallowtheriderstoset-upfor
thenextfeature.
5.13.3.
CompetitorTraining.Trainingtimesoropenrunningofthecourseis
at the discretion of the competition jury but depending on the size of field
shouldbeatleast30-60minutestoallowallcompetitorstheopportunityto
ridethroughthecourseaminimumoftwotimesbeforetheofficialstartofthe
competition.
5.13.4.
TheStart
5.13.4.1. Thestartorderwillbedeterminedbythecompetitionjuryandwillbe
announced at the Team Captains/Rider Meeting the night prior to
competition.
5.13.4.2. TheHeadJudgeshallcommunicatetothestarterwhenthejudgesare
readyforthenextcompetitor.
5.13.5.
Execution of Slopestyle Format. Competition format will be clearly
definedattheCaptains/Ridersmeetingbythejury.
63
2016-2017CompetitionandRulesManual–ApprovedJanuary12,2017
2016.v.1.4
5.13.6.
Helmets. Helmets manufactured for ski sports are required for all
competitorsinSlopestylecompetitionandofficialtraining.
5.13.7.
Judges’Stand
5.13.7.1. The minimum size of the scaffolding area must be 8 meters by 2
meters.
5.13.7.2. The judges' viewing area should be constructed to provide ample
roomfortheappropriatenumberofjudgesandprovideroomforviewing
andallproperamenitiesfortheoperationofthecompetition.
5.13.7.3. Thejudgesstandneedstobeelevatedandcenteredalongthesideof
the course to view the complete slopestyle course. If this is not possible
then two judging stands need to be constructed as the judging crew will
needtobesplituptoviewthecourse.
5.13.7.4. Thejudges'areashouldbefencedorprotectedfromcompetitorsand
spectators.
5.13.7.5. No competitor, team representative or spectator may approach the
judges'standorspeakwiththejudgesduringcompetition.
5.13.8.
SlopestyleJudging
5.13.8.1. SlopestylejudgingshallbedoneusingOverallImpression.
5.13.8.2. In Slopestyle, the run's overall precision will be evaluated, including
theexecutionoftherunandthelineattempted.Theoverallcomposition
oftheruniskey;thesequencesoftricks,the
5.13.8.3. amountofriskintheroutine,theprogressionofnewtricksandusing
theslopestylefeatures.
5.13.8.4. ThethreemainelementsintheSlopestylejudgingaretrickdifficulty,
execution,andamplitudeforeachtrickintheslopestylerun.Fallsarepart
ofexecutionandwillbetakenintoconsiderationoneverytrick.
5.13.8.5. When two to four judges are judging Overall Impression, all scores
willcount.beaveragedforthecompetitor’sscore.count.
5.13.8.6. WhenfivejudgesarejudgingOverallImpression,thehighestandthe
lowestscoreswillbethrownoutandthethreeremainingscoresmaymay
will be added together added together averaged for the competitor's
score.
5.13.9.
Scoring
5.13.9.1. TheHeadJudgewillannouncewhichscoringsystemwillbeusedfor
thecompetitionduringthefirstTeamCaptains'/Riders'meeting.
5.13.9.2. Overall Scoring System. The judges score each run based on the
OverallImpressioncategory.Thescoreofeachjudgeisbetween0and10
usingonedecimalor0and100.
64
2016-2017CompetitionandRulesManual–ApprovedJanuary12,2017
2016.v.1.4
5.13.9.3. RankingSystem.Thejudgeslookatalloftherunsandnotedownthe
trick names, difficulty, amplitude and landing. According to their
impressions and using their notes, they will make a personal ranking of
thecompetitorsattheendoftheround.Pointswillbegivenaccordingto
thecompetitor'splacement(1.Place=1point,2.Place=2points,a.s.o.)
To determine the final ranking, the points of all the judges are added up
andthewinneristheriderwiththelowestpoints.
5.14. CausesForDisqualification
5.14.1.
Anindividualcompetitormaybedisqualifiedifhe/she:
5.14.1.1. Isnotqualifiedaccordingtoamateurruling.
5.14.1.2. Participatesinthecompetitionunderfalsepretenses.
5.14.1.3. Trains on a course closed to competitors, alters the course in a
mannerforbiddenoractscontrarytotheinstructionsoftheJuryastothe
executionofthetrainingorthecompetition.
5.14.1.4. Appearslateatthestart,makesafalsestart,missesastart,orviolates
theregulationsforstarting.
5.14.1.5. Failstocrossthegatelineswithatleastonefootbuckledtotheboard.
5.14.1.6. Acceptsoutsidehelpinanyformduringthecompetition.Outsidehelp
consists of, but is not limited to, another person, course equipment and
polesthatmakeupthecourse.
5.14.1.7. Fails to give way to an overtaking competitor at the first call or
interfereswiththeirrun.(Doesnotapplyinsnowboardcross).
5.14.1.8. Fails to cross the gate lines without at least one foot attached to the
board. A gate has been passed correctly when the rider has at least the
frontfootfixedinthebindingontheboardandtheentireboardcrosses
thegateline.Incaseofafall,theridermustpassthroughtheturningline.
A competitor who knowingly has not corrected a missed gate may not
continuethroughfurthergatesforastartinthesecondrun.
5.14.1.9. In the event that a competitor removes a pole from its vertical
positionbeforethecompetitor'sboardandbothfeethavepassedthegate
line, the board and feet still must pass the original gate line (marking in
thesnow).
5.14.1.10.Does not wear the official start number (bibs) or alters it in a
prohibitedmanner.
5.14.1.11.Doesnotcomplywiththesafetyregulations.
5.14.1.12.Doesnotcomplywiththeregulationsforsponsorshipandequipment.
5.14.1.13.Interruptsordisturbsanothercompetitorduringhis/herrun.
5.14.1.14.Unsportsmanlikeconduct-swearing,maliciouslyknockingdowngates
ortearingupthecourse.
65
2016-2017CompetitionandRulesManual–ApprovedJanuary12,2017
2016.v.1.4
5.14.1.15.InGiantSlalom.Atimelimitof200%oftheaveragetimeofthefastest
4 competitors in the first seed shall be imposed as cause for
disqualification. This shall be announced at race registration and seed
meetings.
5.14.1.16.Contact in Snowboard Cross. Intentional contact by pushing, pulling
or other means, which causes another competitor to slow down, fall or
exit the course is not allowed and is an automatic disqualification.
Unavoidable ”casual contact” may be acceptable. All contact infractions
willbeatthediscretionofthecoursejudgesandracejury.
5.15. OrganizingCommitteeandItsDuties
5.15.1.
If the organizing club or association does not act as organizing
committee it will designate an organizing committee. The organizing
committeewillappointacompetitioncommitteeforalltechnicalmattersand
make the necessary preparations and directly carry out the running of the
competitionattheresort.
5.15.2.
The organizing committee must assume all responsibility to ensure
that the details involved in hosting competitions are properly controlled. The
importance of efficient communication with all individuals and participating
teamsisessentialtoawell-plannedcompetition.
5.15.3.
The organizing committee should provide an announcement that
providestoallparticipantsandguestsmaterialsonaccommodationandtravel
details.
5.15.4.
The Organizing Committee is responsible for providing results to
individuals participating in the competition immediately following the
competition.
5.16. CompetitionCommittee,CompetitionOfficialsandTheirDuties
5.16.1.
TheCompetitionCommitteeiscomposedofthefollowing:
•
TheChiefofCompetition
•
TheChiefofCourse
•
TheChiefofTimingandCalculation
•
TheChiefGateJudge(giantslalom)HeadJudge(snowboardcross)
•
ChiefofFinishforsnowboardcross)
•
TheCompetitionSecretary
5.16.2.
The Competition Committee appoints all additional Officials not
alreadydesignated.
5.16.3.
The Competition Committee is responsible for all technical matters,
includingtheselectionandpreparationofthecourses.
66
2016-2017CompetitionandRulesManual–ApprovedJanuary12,2017
2016.v.1.4
5.16.4.
TheChiefofCompetitiondirectsandcontrolstheworkofallOfficials,
summons the meetings of the Competition Committee for consideration of
technical questions and generally acts as chairperson of the team officers
meetings,afterconsultationwiththeTechnicalDelegate(TD).
5.16.5.
The Chief of Timing and Calculation is responsible for the
coordinationofofficialsatthestartandfinish,includingtimingandcalculation.
In giant slalom, he/she or a special assistant will decide the interval between
starts. The following officials are under his/her direction: Starter, Assistant
Starter, Start Recorder, Chief Time Keeper, Assistant Time Keepers, Finish
Controller,ChiefofCalculationandhis/herassistants.
5.16.6.
TheChiefofCourseisresponsibleforthepreparationsofthecourse
in accordance with the decisions of the Competition Committee and the Jury.
He/shemustbefamiliarwithlocalsnowconditionsontheterrainconcerned.
5.16.7.
TheCourseSetter,whomayalsoactasChiefofCourse,isresponsible
forthesettingofgatesforgiantslalomandsnowboardcourse.Coursesetters
areappointedbytheJury.Eachrunofacompetitionistobesetbyadifferent
course setter.He/she must give exclusive priority to the safety of the
competitor. Course setters must take care to set symmetrical courses that do
not favor goofy or regular riders. Where especially bad weather and snow
conditionswarrant,theJurymaytakemeasurestosafeguardthecompetitors.
TheCourseSetter’sworkisotherwisesupervisedbytheChiefofCourseandby
theJury.
5.16.8.
The Chief Gate Judge (giant slalom) organizes and supervises the
workofthegatejudges.He/Shedesignatesthegateseachwillsuperviseand
places them in position. At the end of the first run and the end of the
competition, he/she will collect the gate judges' control cards for delivery to
theReferee.He/Shemustdistribute,ingoodtimetoeachgatejudge,necessary
materials (control card, pencil, start list, etc.) and be prepared to offer
assistanceduringtheevent.e.g.,keepingthespectatorsoffthecourse,helping
maintain the course, etc. He/She must make sure the numbering and the
markingofthegatesisdonewithintherequiredtime.
5.16.9.
The Head Judge (snowboard cross) organizes and supervises the
freeskiingjudges.He/Shedesignatesthecategoryeachjudgewillevaluateand
supervises their conduct on the judges' stand. At the end of the first run, the
Head Judge will collect all the scorecards and deliver them to the Chief of
calculation. He/She will check to make sure each judge's scores are in range
with the others. He/She will offer assistance to the judges when necessary to
keepspectatorsandcompetitorsawayfromthejudges'stand.
5.16.10.
GateJudges’ObligationsandDuties
5.16.10.1.Gate judges observe the passage of competitors through the gates.
Eachgatejudgemusthaveathoroughknowledgeofthecompetitionrules.
Thegatejudge'sdecisionmustbeclearandnonpartisan.His/Herconduct
must be calm, watchful and prudent. In case of a doubt, the gate judge
67
2016-2017CompetitionandRulesManual–ApprovedJanuary12,2017
2016.v.1.4
should give the competitor the benefit of doubt. The gate judge must
declare a fault only when he/she is convinced that a fault has been
committed.
5.16.10.2.In case of a protest, he/she must be able to explain clearly and
definitivelyhowthefaultwascommitted.
5.16.10.3.Ifthegatejudgeisindoubtwhetherafaulthasoccurred,he/shemust
makeacarefulinvestigation.He/Shecanconsulttheadjacentgatejudgein
ordertoconfirmhis/hernotes.He/Shecanevendemand,viaamemberof
the Jury, that the race be briefly interrupted so he/she may check the
tracksonthecourse.
5.16.10.4.The opinions of the public cannot be allowed to influence the gate
judges'judgment.Likewise,theymaynotaccepttheopinionsofwitnesses,
eventhoughtheymaybeexperiencedones.
5.16.10.5.The responsibility of the gate judge begins with the competitor
approachingthefirstgatetheycontrolandendswhenthecompetitorhas
passedthroughthelastgateundertheirjurisdiction.
5.16.10.6.ResponsibilitytotheCompetitor:Acompetitor,incaseofanerrorora
fall, can turn to the gate judge and question him or her. The gate judge
must inform the competitor if he/she has committed a fault that would
lead to disqualification. With a clear, decisive voice, the gate judge
answersthecompetitor'squestionwithoneofthefollowingwords:-"Go!"
if the competitor should expect no disqualification, since the gate judge
has ruled the gate passage as correct; -"Back!" if the competitor may
expect disqualification. The competitor is fully responsible for his/her
actionand,inthisrespect,cannotholdthegatejudgeliable.
5.16.10.7.In accordance with the instructions given by the Jury, the Chief Gate
Judge(orassistantgatejudge)collectsallthegatecards,andthenpasses
them on to the Referee. At the conclusion of the first run, the Chief Gate
Judgedistributesthegatecardsforthesecondrun.
5.16.10.8.Each gate judge who has recorded a disqualifying fault or who has
been witness to an incident leading to a rerun must be available to the
Juryuntilafterthesettlementofanyprotests.Itistheresponsibilityofthe
T.D.todismissagatejudgewhoiswaitingtobecalledbytheJury.
5.16.10.9.Other duties: Replace gate poles vertically (a leaning pole can aid or
hinderacompetitor).Replaceknockedoutpolesintheirexactpositions;
thepositionismarkedbythedyeinthesnow.Replace,ifpossible,tornor
missing flags or banners. Replace broken gate poles according to color
(blueorred);thepiecesofbrokenpolesmustbestoredinawaythatwill
notendangercompetitorsorspectators.Maintainandrepairtheirsection
ofthecourse.Keepthecourseclear.
5.16.10.10.
Nogatejudgeshouldberesponsibleformorethantwogatesin
GiantSlalom.
68
2016-2017CompetitionandRulesManual–ApprovedJanuary12,2017
2016.v.1.4
5.16.10.11.
In the case of Snowboard Cross all Gate Judges must be
equipped with radios to ensure communication to the chief of finish
duringthewholecompetition.
5.16.11.
Chief of Finish – Snowboard Cross. The chief of finish is responsible
fortheorganizationandsupervisionofthefinishlineJudges.Thechiefoffinish
will accept protests in the finish area. The chief of finish must report all
protestsimmediatelytotheotherJurymembersimmediately.
5.16.12.
JudgingProcedure-SnowboardCross
5.16.12.1.Each judge will use scorecards, which indicate who the judge is, and
thebibnumberofthecompetitor.Allscorecardswillindicateaplacefor
eachcompetitorineachraceorheat.
5.16.12.2.No competitor or spectator will be allowed to approach the judges
areaandtalktothejudgesduringcompetition.
5.16.12.3.Judges for Snowboard Cross must determine the order of finish for
eachraceorheatandcommunicatethefinishorderdirectlytothechiefof
finish.
5.16.12.4.ForSnowboardCrosstheremustbeaminimumoffourjudges.
5.16.12.5.The Competition Secretary is responsible for all secretarial work for
thetechnicalaspectsofthecompetitionandamongothersforpreparation
ofthedrawandthestartorder.TheSecretarymustensurethattheofficial
results contain the information required by the organizing Competition
Committee. He/she is responsible for the minutes of the Competition
Committee,Jury,andteamofficersmeetings.He/shemustensurethatall
formsforstart,finish,timing,calculationandgatejudgingandjudgingare
well prepared and handed over to the officials concerned in good order
and at the proper time. The Secretary receives any official protests and
gives them to those who are concerned. He/she must facilitate the
calculationofresultsbyappropriatepreparation,andensurethattheyare
duplicatedandpublishedasquicklyaspossibleafterthecompletionofthe
competition.
5.17. CompositionAndDutiesOfTheCompetitionJury
5.17.1.
CompositionoftheGSJury
TechnicalDelegate
ChiefofCompetition
CompetitionReferee
ChiefofFinish
5.17.2.
CompositionoftheSnowboardCrossJury
TechnicalDelegate
ChiefofCompetition
69
2016-2017CompetitionandRulesManual–ApprovedJanuary12,2017
2016.v.1.4
CompetitionReferee
HeadJudge
ChiefofFinish
5.17.3.
The Technical Delegate and Head Judge are appointed by the
organizing committee. The Referee is selected by the Technical Delegate. A
competitormaynotbeamemberoftheJury.
5.17.4.
Voting: The Technical Delegate is chairman of the Jury. He/She
conductstheJurymeetings.Eachofthefollowingmembershasonevoteinthe
Jury:
•
T.D.
•
ChiefofCompetition
•
Referee(alpineevents)orChiefofFinish(snowboardevents)
5.17.5.
Decisionsaremadebysimplemajorityvoteofmemberspresentand
voting.Inthecaseofatie,theT.D.caststhedecidingvote.
5.17.6.
DutiesoftheJury
5.17.6.1. The Jury monitors the adherence to the rules throughout the entire
competition,includingtheofficialtraining.
5.17.6.2. From a technical standpoint particularly by: checking the set course,
checking the snow conditions on and beside the course, checking the
preparation of the course, approving the use of snow compactors and
other chemicals, checking the crowd control systems, checking the start,
thefinishandthefinishoutrun,checkingthefirstaidservice,appointing
thecoursesetters,settingthetimeofcoursesetting,overseeingthework
ofthecoursesetters,checkingthefasteningofthegateflags,astotherisk
of injury, opening or closing the competition courses for training in
consideration of the technical preparations and the prevailing weather
conditions,determiningthemannerofcourseinspection,inspectionofthe
coursebeforethecompetition,determiningthenumberofforerunnersfor
each run and setting the start order of the forerunners, debriefing the
forerunners, changing the start order in consideration of course
conditions,inextraordinaryconditions,changingthestartintervals,giving
instructions to and obtaining information from the gate judges, checking
thejudgesstandandthejudgesworkingconditions.
5.17.6.3. QuestionsnotcoveredbyRules:Ingeneral,theJurytakesdecisionson
allquestionsnotclarifiedbytherules.
5.17.7.
TheTechnicalDelegate(T.D.)
5.17.7.1. Responsibilities.TheprimarydutiesoftheT.D.aretomakesurethat
therulesanddirectionsofsnowboardarefollowed,toseetheeventruns
smoothly,toadvisetheorganizers,withinthescopeoftheirduties.
70
2016-2017CompetitionandRulesManual–ApprovedJanuary12,2017
2016.v.1.4
5.17.7.1.1.
Beforethecompetition,theT.D.:
•
inspects the competition and training courses and checks on
thesafetymeasurestaken.
•
controls the fastening of the gate flags which may constitute
anyriskofinjurytothecompetitor.
•
collaboratesintheadministrativeandtechnicalpreparations.
•
checksonthepresenceofsufficientradiosforallmembersof
the Jury.checks courses with regard to preparation, marking,
crowdcontrol,aswellasthelayoutofstartandfinishareas.
•
supervisesthecoursesettingtogetherwiththeJury.
•
checks the location of towers and sees they are adequately
protected.
•
checks all technical installations such as timekeeping, hand
timing,communications,judgesstand,transportofpeople,etc.
•
takespartinallmeetingsoftheJuryandoftheteamcaptains.
•
workscloselywiththeofficialsoftheOrganizingCommittee.
•
hastheright,ifaneventcannotbecarriedoutontheselected
course because of "force majeure", to move the event to a
substitute course proposed by the organizer. This, on the
explicit condition that the necessary safety measures can be
fulfilled.
5.17.7.1.2.
Duringthecompetition,theT.D.:
•
keeps watch on whether the valid rules and directives are
obeyed in regard to advertising, etc., on clothing and race
equipment.
•
keeps watch on the technical and organizational conduct of
theevent.
•
punishesbreachesoftherules.
5.17.7.1.3.
5.17.8.
Afterthecompetition,theT.D.
•
helps with the compilation of the Referee's disqualification
report.
•
presentsproperlysubmittedproteststotheJuryfordecision.
Referees(alpineevents)
5.17.8.1. TheteamcaptainsappointtheRefereeandassistantreferee.
5.17.8.2. Incriticalcases,especiallythoseinvolvingdangertothecompetitors,
the directions of the T.D. are also binding for the Referee and assistant
71
2016-2017CompetitionandRulesManual–ApprovedJanuary12,2017
2016.v.1.4
referee. In particular, prerequisites should be established by the T.D.
togetherwiththereferees,toensurethebestpossibletechnicalrunningof
acompetition.
5.17.8.3. DutiesoftheRefereeandAssistantReferee:
•
Drawingstartnumbers,ifnecessary.
•
Inspection of the course immediately after it is set, alone or
accompaniedbymembersoftheJury.
•
Changing the course by removing or adding gates; if the Referee
inspectsthecoursealone,hisdecisionisfinal.Thecoursesettermustbe
informedofsuchchanges,ifhe/shewasnotpresentatthisinspection.
•
Receiving the reports of the start and finish referees and the
competition officials about the infractions of the rules and the gate
faultsattheendofthefirstrun,andagainattheendofthecompetition.
•
Checking,signingandpostingtheReferee'sminutes,immediatelyafter
eachrun,ontheofficialnoticeboardandalsoatthefinish.Theminutes
should include the names of the competitors disqualified, the gate
numbers where the faults occurred, the names of the gate judges who
noted the faults leading to the disqualifications and the exact time the
disqualificationswereposted.
5.17.8.4. Collaboration with the T.D. The Referee and the assistant referee
mustworkverycloselywiththeT.D.Theassistantrefereecansubstitute
fortheReferee,ifnecessary.
5.17.8.5. StartReferee.Thestartrefereemustremainatthestartthroughout
training and competition. He/She must make sure the rules for starting
andthestartorderareproperlyobserved.
•
He/Shedetermineslateandfalsestarts.
•
He/She determines the violations against the rules for equipment
andimmediatelytakesthemeasuresprovidedforbytherules.
•
At the end of the competition, he/she reports to the Referee the
namesofthecompetitorswhodidnotstart,havemadefalseorlate
startsorotherinfringements.
5.17.8.6. Finish Referee. The finish referee must remain at the finish
throughouttrainingandcompetition.He/Shemustmakesurethatandthe
rulesforfinishingareproperlyobserved.
72
•
He/She supervises the finish controller, the timing and the crowd
controlinthefinisharea.
•
He/Shemustbeabletocommunicate,immediately,withthestart
atalltime.
2016-2017CompetitionandRulesManual–ApprovedJanuary12,2017
2016.v.1.4
•
5.17.9.
ThefinishrefereemustreporttotheRefereeimmediatelyafterthe
competition.
StartandFinishOfficials
5.17.9.1. TheStarter.Forsnowboardcrossevents,thestartermusthaveradio
contact with the Head Judge during training and competition. For giant
slalom events, the starter must synchronize his/her watch with those of
the assistant starter and the chief timekeeper within ten minutes of the
start. The starter is responsible for the warning signal and the start
command, as well as for the accuracy of the intervals between these
signals.He/Sheassignsthesupervisionofthecompetitorstotheassistant
starter.
5.17.9.2. Chief Timekeeper (alpine events). The Chief Timekeeper is
responsible for the accuracy of the timing. He/She synchronizes the
watcheswiththestarterasshortlybeforeandafterthecompetitionasis
possible.He/Shemustpublishunofficialtimesasquicklyaspossible(on
the scoreboard). If the electronic timing fails, the chief timekeeper must
communicateimmediatelywiththestartrefereeandtheT.D.
5.17.9.3. Finish Controller / Chief of Finish (snowboard cross) The finish
controllerhasthefollowingduties:
73
•
Supervisionofthefinish.
•
Supervisionofthepropercrossingofthefinishline.
•
Recordingthefinishingorderofallcompetitorswhocompletethe
course.
2016-2017CompetitionandRulesManual–ApprovedJanuary12,2017
2016.v.1.4
6.0 SECTION6–FREESKIRULES
6.1. USASA,USSAandFISRulesvs.USCSARules
6.1.1. OfficialFreeskiCompetitionRulesfortheUSCSAConferencequalifyingmeets
and Regional Championships leading to the “United States Collegiate Freeski
Championships”(TM).
6.1.2. IftheUSCSAcompetitionissanctionedbytheUSASA,thentheUSASArules
shallgovernUSCSAFreeskicompetitioninallareasnotspecificallycoveredin
the USCSA Rule Book. USASA rulings are referenced with (USASA) brackets.
USASA rulebooks are available for download at www.USASA.org. USCSA
competitionsshallbegovernedfirstbytheUSCSArules;second,inallareasnot
specificallycovered,theUSASACompetitionrulesshallbeused.
6.1.3. IftheUSCSAcompetitionissanctionedbyFIS(ICR)andUSSA,thenFISand
USSArulesshallgovernUSCSAFreeskicompetitioninallareasnotspecifically
covered in the USCSA Rule Book. FIS and USSA rulings are referenced with
{FIS} (USSA) brackets. FIS and USSA rule books are available from USSA, PO
Box 100, Park City, UT 84060, ph. (435) 649-9090 and from each
organization's website. USCSA competitions shall be governed first by the
USCSArules,second,inallareasnotspecificallycovered,theUSSACompetition
rulesshallbeused,andthird,inallareasnotspecificallycoveredtheFIS(ICR)
shallbeused.
6.1.4. Inallinstancesofcompetition,thesanctioninggoverningbodyshouldbethe
primary rule provider. When ambiguity arises by following the rules of the
sanctioninggoverningbody,thenuseofthealternategoverningbodyruleswill
beused.
6.2. TheStart
6.2.1. The start area must be closed off so that only the starting competitors and
officialsconcernedwiththestartarelocatedinthearea.Thestartareamustbe
protected appropriately against inclement weather. A special roped off area
mustbe,providedfortrainers,teamcaptains,etc.,inwhichtheymaytakecare
ofthewaitingcompetitorswithoutbeinginterruptedbythepublic.
6.2.2. The Start ramp shall be prepared in such a way that the competitors can
standrelaxedonthestartingline,andcanquicklyreachfullspeedafterleaving
the starting gate. Push off posts will be installed at the starting gate for all
events.Thespecificationswillbeadjustedtotheneedsofthespecificevents.
6.2.3. The posts supporting the SkierCross Time Trial starting gate should be
approximately 60- 90 cm apart and shall not project more than 50 cm above
thesnow.Thestartinggate,consistingofastartingmechanismsconnectedon
to a wand (set below the knee), will be placed so that starting is impossible
withoutitsopening.
74
2016-2017CompetitionandRulesManual–ApprovedJanuary12,2017
2016.v.1.4
6.2.4. No official or attendant who could possibly give an advantage to or disturb
thestartingcompetitormaybebehindhim/her.Alloutsidehelpisforbidden.
By order of the starter, the competitor must take his/her place behind the
startinggate.Thestartermustnottouchthecompetitoratthestart.Pushingoff
fromthestartpostsorothersimilaraidsisallowed.
6.2.5. The Starter: After he/she has ascertained that the course is ready, and ten
secondsbeforethestart,thestartershallgiveeachcompetitora"Tensecond"
alert.Fivesecondsbeforethestarthe/sheshallcount"5,4,3,2,1"andthengive
the audible start command of "GO". The window to start is 10 seconds. For
SkierCross, the starter gives the competitor the warning “Riders ready – Go
attention“–randomly1-4secondsbeforethedoorsopen.
6.2.6. A competitor who is not ready to start 1 minute after being called, will be
disqualified.TheStartRefereemay,however,excusesuchadelayif,inhis/her
opinion,thedelayisdueto"forcemajeure",andallowthestartprovisionally.
(For example, breakdown of a competitor's personal equipment or minor
sicknessofacompetitordoesnotconstitute"forcemajeure".)Inthiscase,the
delayedcompetitorstartsattheendofthecurrentseed.TheStartRefereewill
makethenecessarydecisionsinthecaseofalatestartandmustimmediately
informthereferee,givingthestartnumberandnameofthecompetitor(s)who
weretobeallowedtostartbecauseoflateappearance,orwhowereallowedto
startprovisionallyinspiteoflateappearance.
6.2.7. Valid and False Starts. In competitions with a fixed start interval, the
competitor must start on the start signal. The start time is valid if it occurs
within five seconds before or five seconds after the official start time. A
competitorwhodoesnotstartwithinthatspanoftimewillbedisqualified.
6.2.7.1.
Acompetitormustleavethestartwithbothfeetattachedtotheboard.
6.2.7.2. Immediately after the competition, the start referee will inform the
Referee of the start numbers and names of the competitors who made a
falsestartorhavecompromisedthestartingrules.
6.3. TheFinish
6.3.1. The finish area must be plainly visible to the competitor approaching the
finish. It must be wide, with a gentle sloped smooth out run. It must be
especiallywellpreparedandsmoothlypackedtomakestoppingeasy.
6.3.2. Thefinishareaistobecompletelyfencedin.Anyunauthorizedentrymustbe
prevented.
6.3.3. Snow walls, straw or hay bags, foam rubber or other appropriate safety
materialsshallbeusedtopreventanypossibilityofacollisionwiththefinish
structures.
6.3.4. Thefinishlineismarkedbytwopostsorverticalbannersthatareconnected
by a horizontal banner marked "finish". In GS and SBX the finish must be no
lessthan10mwide.Thepostsusedtomountthetimingdevicesmustalsobe
75
2016-2017CompetitionandRulesManual–ApprovedJanuary12,2017
2016.v.1.4
atleastasfarapartasthefinishpostsandshallbeprotectedjustascarefully
andadequatelyasthefinishposts.Thetimingpostsaretobeplaceddirectly
behindthefinishpostsorbanners,onthedownhillside.Thefinishlinemust
beclearlymarkedwithdye.
6.3.5. Withelectronictiming,thetimeistakenwhenacompetitorcrossestheline
between the finish posts with any part of his/her body or equipment and so
breaks the contact or beam. The finish line must be crossed with at least one
footattachedtotheboard.InFreeskiCrossthecompetitor'splaceoffinishis
determinedwhenanypartofthebodyorFreeskicrossesthefinishline.
6.3.6. In case of a fall at the finish, the time can be taken without both of the
competitor’s feet having crossed the finish line. In this case the time is taken
when any part of the competitor's body or equipment stops the timekeeping
system. With hand timing, the time is taken when any part of the competitor
crossesthefinishline.
6.3.7. Forthistimetobecomevalid,thecompetitormustimmediatelycompletely
crossthefinishlinewithatleastonefootattachedtotheboard.
6.3.8. ElectronicTiming:Theremustbecommunication(radios)betweenthestart
and finish. Photoelectric cells are placed at such a height that a competitor
finishingnormally,cutsthebeamwiththelowerhalfofhis/herlegs,between
theankleandtheknee.
6.3.9. In case of a failure in the main electronic timing system, the results of the
backupelectronictimingwillbevalid.Utilizationoftimestakenbyhand;hand
timesmaybeusedintheofficialresultsafteracorrectionhasbeencalculated.
6.3.10.
Hand Timing. For all competitions back-up hand timing must record
the 1/10ths or 1/100ths of a second. It must be completely separate and
independentoftheelectronictimingatthestartandfinish.Thewatchesmust
besynchronizedwiththeelectronictiming.
6.3.11.
Calculation of the correction (E.E.T.): To calculate the difference
betweenthetimestakenbyhandandtheelectronictimesofthe6competitors
startingbeforethemissingtimeandthe6startingafterorifnecessarythe12
nearest competitors. The two times showing the greatest differences are
eliminated. The sum of the remaining 10 time differences is divided by 10 to
givethecorrection,whichmustbeappliedtothehandtimeofthecompetitor
withoutanelectronictime.
6.4. Results
6.4.1. Organizers shall provide appropriate facilities for continuous visual or
acousticpresentationofallregisteredtimesorscoresofallcompetitors.
6.4.2. As soon as possible after completion of the competition (race or heat in
SkierCross),unofficialtimes,scoresanddisqualificationsshallbepostedonthe
official scoreboard/notice board, and at the finish; including names of
competitors who have been disqualified and the names of officials who have
76
2016-2017CompetitionandRulesManual–ApprovedJanuary12,2017
2016.v.1.4
notedthefaultsleadingtothedisqualifications,andincludetheexacttimethe
disqualifications were posted. The time limit for protests is counted from the
momentofthisnotification.Protestsenteredlaterareconsiderednullandvoid.
6.4.3. In SkierCross a scoreboard/s shall be provided at both the top and the
bottomofthecourse
6.4.4. Unofficial Results: Results shall be considered unofficial until approved by
the T.D. Unofficial results shall be posted on a scoreboard, which shall be
readily visible from the area provided for the competitors who have finished.
Whenever possible, unofficial results should be announced to the public over
loudspeakers.
6.4.5. TheChiefofCalculationsisresponsibleforquickandaccuratecalculationof
results.He/Shesupervisestheimmediateduplicationofunofficialresultsand
thepublicationofofficialresultsafterexpirationoftheprotestinterval,orafter
anyprotestshavebeendecided.
6.4.6. Allresultsaretobesubmittedseparatelyformenandwomen.Competition
resultsshallinclude:
-thenameoftheorganizingcluborassociation;
-thenameofthecompetition;
-thedateofthecompetition;
-thelocationofthecompetition;
-thetypeofcompetition(SKX,SLP,HP);
-theT.D.,SKX;
-theChiefofCompetition,SKX,SLP,HP;
-theChiefofCourse,SKX,SLP,HP;
-thereferees(includingtheassistant,start,finishreferees),SKX,SLP,HP;
-theHeadJudge,SKX,SLP,HP;
-thestartreferee,SKX,SLP,HP;
-thenamesofalljudges,SKX;
-thelengthofthecourse,SKX;
-thedegreeofinclinationofthecourse,SKX;
-thewidthofthecourse,SKX;
-theheightofthecourse,SKX;
-competitor'sbibnumber;
-competitor'sname;
-competitor'sschoolname;
77
2016-2017CompetitionandRulesManual–ApprovedJanuary12,2017
2016.v.1.4
-firstruntime,SKXTT;
-secondruntime,SKXTT;
-totaltime,SKXTT;
-competitor'splacepoint/s,SLP,HP;
-competitionbracketing,SKX;
-USCSA team results and team to include the top three scores (SKX, SLP,
HP) of each scoring member, along with the sum of the top 3 placepoint
finishersforeachteam.
6.5. JointRegulationsoftheCourse
6.5.1. AllcoursesmustcomplywithstandardssetbyUSCSA,followingtheUSASA
standards if sanctioned by USASA or following USSA and FIS if sanctioned by
USSA.
6.5.2. When visibility is poor, pine boughs or dye shall be used to spread on the
sidesofthecoursetoaidindepthperception.
6.5.3. When possible appropriate warm up slopes, closed to the public, must be
madeavailableforallcourses.
6.5.4. Onaclosedcourse,nooneexceptfortheJuryispermittedtochangegates,
flagsetc.ormodifythecoursestructure(jumps,bumps,etc.).
6.5.5. Competitorswhoenteraclosedcompetitioncourseattimesotherthanthose
published by the Jury may be disqualified. Trainers, servicemen, coaches etc.
who are allowed on a closed competition course are to be determined by the
Jury.
6.5.6. Gates(SkierCrossevent):Allpolesusedinthealpineeventsaredividedinto
rigidpolesandflexpoles.
6.5.6.1. Rigid Poles: Round, uniform poles with a diameter between 25 mm
and32mm,withoutjoints,areallowedasrigidpoles.Rigidpolesmayonly
beusedastheoutsidepoleofaslalomgateandthenon-impactpoleofa
GSgatesystemwithagatepanel.Theymustbeofsuchalengththat,when
set, they project at least 1.80 meters out of the snow and they must be
madeofanon-splinteringmaterial.
6.5.6.2. FlexPoles:Flexpolesmustconformtotherigidpolespecificationsbut
arefittedwithaspring-loadedhinge.
6.5.6.3. StubbyPoles:Stubbypolesareflexpoleswithnotmorethan20cmof
poleabovethehinge.StubbyPolesmaybeusedforParallelevents.
6.5.7. TheChiefofCoursemustprovideenoughofthefollowing:
-blueandredslalompoles;
-acorrespondingnumberofflags,dividedbycolors;
78
2016-2017CompetitionandRulesManual–ApprovedJanuary12,2017
2016.v.1.4
-sledgehammers,crowbars,drills,wedges,etc.
-gatenumbers;
-sparepoles;
-anddyeformarkingthepositionofthepoles.
6.5.8. Marking Gates: The positions of the gate poles are to be marked with an
easily recognizable coloring substance that remains visible throughout the
entirerace.
6.5.9. Numbering Gates: The gates must be numbered from top to bottom of the
course and the numbers attached to the outside pole. Start and finish are not
counted.
6.6. ProtestsConcerningFreeskiEvents
6.6.1. Protests shall be submitted in accordance with section and formatted as
followsforalleventsinthisdiscipline.Allprotestsmustbegiveninwritingby
ateamofficerorcoachtoavotingmemberofthejury,unlessnotedotherwise
below, and be accompanied by a cash deposit. For Regional and National
events, the deposit is $50.00 for all protests submitted in this discipline. The
deposit will be refunded if the protest is upheld. Such protests must be
received in the time periods as noted below or will not be considered. The
depositmaybewaivedatconferencelevelevents.
6.6.2. Nocompetitor,coach,teamofficer,orspectatorwillbeallowedtoapproach
thejudge’sareaandtalktothejudgesduringanycompetition.
6.6.3. ProtestsConcerningtheCourse:Obstacles,dangerpoints,visibility,etc.,must
bepresentedgiveninwriting,byateamofficertotheChiefofCompetition60
minutespriortothestartoftheanycompetition.
6.6.4. Protests During the Competition: A team officer who protests against any
actionbyanothercompetitororanofficialduringthecompetitionmustsubmit
his/her protest to the Referee or any other member of the jury within 15
minutesaftertheendingofthecompetition.Protestsaretobesubmittedatthe
location designated on the official notice board or at a place announced at a
teamcaptain’smeeting.ForSkierCross,beforethenextheatbegins.
6.6.5. Protests Concerning Disqualifications, Timing: A Protest against
disqualificationsortimingmustpresentedbegiveninwriting,byateamofficer
to a voting member of the jury and be accompanied by a cash deposit; for
Regionals and Nationals the deposit is $50.00. Such protest must be received
within 15 minutes of the posting of a disqualification or unofficial time. The
depositwillberefundediftheprotestisupheld.(The$25depositrequirement
may be waived at conference level competitions.) In SkierCross the protest
mustbesubmittedbeforethenextraceorheatbegins)or,atthelatest,within
15 minutes after the announcement of the disqualification and that protests
enteredafterthisareconsiderednullandvoid.InSkierCrossitcanbedecided
79
2016-2017CompetitionandRulesManual–ApprovedJanuary12,2017
2016.v.1.4
thatprotestscanbedeliveredverbally/orallytothereferee.Theteamcaptains
mustbein-formedbeforehand.
6.6.6. ProtestsConcerningFalseCalculationandClericalErrors:Acomplaint,based
notonanallegedbreachoftherulesonthepartofanofficialorcompetitor,but
onanallegederrorin,calculatingtheresults,shallbeconsideredifitissentby,
ateamofficerviaregisteredlettertotheRaceCommitteewithinonemonthof
thedateofthecompetition.Ifthemistakeisprovencorrectlistsofresultsshall
bepublished.
6.6.7. SkierCross: Protests/DSQ’s. Disqualifications will be announced and/or
postedimmediatelyaftereachheatatadesignatedareaatthebottomandtop
of the course. All protests must be reported to the Chief of Finish before the
next heat begins. Protests may be submitted by the affected competitor(s) or
teamofficer,butmustbesubmittedpriortotheeffectedathlete’sdepartureof
the finish corral. Protests can be delivered verbally / orally initially to the
Finish Referee if acceptable to the jury, but must be followed by a written
statement. The protest fee must be paid at or before the conclusion of the
competition.
6.6.8. ExaminationofProtests
6.6.8.1. The Jury meets to deal with the protests under its jurisdiction at a
time predetermined by the Jury and publicly announced on the official
noticeboard.Thisisasettimefollowingthepostingofdisqualificationsor
unofficialresults,whicheverofthesepostingsoccurslater.
6.6.8.2. In dealing with a protest against disqualifications, the gate judge in
question(and,ifneedbe,thegatejudgeoftheadjacentgatecombinations
orotherinvolvedofficials),thecompetitorinquestion,andtheprotesting
team officer shall be invited to attend. Further, the requested additional
evidencesuchasvideotape,photos,movies,etc.shouldbechecked.
6.6.8.3. At the vote on the protest, only the jury members are to be present.
TheTechnicalDelegatechairstheproceedings.Minutesaretobekeptand
signed by the Technical Delegate. The decision requires a majority of all
membersnamedtotheJury,notjustofthosepresent.Incaseofatievote,
theTechnicalDelegate'svoteisdecisive.Thedecisionistobemadepublic
immediatelyaftertheproceedingsbypostingontheofficialnoticeboard
with notation of the posting time. In SkierCross the decision may be
announcedorally.
6.6.9. Appeals
6.6.9.1. Appeals against Jury decisions are to be submitted within 24 hours
after their publication. Appeals against the official results are to be
submittedwithin14daysto:
80
6.6.9.1.1.
TheConferenceAppealsBoard(ConferenceCompetitions)
6.6.9.1.2.
TheRegionalAppealsBoard(RegionalCompetitions)
2016-2017CompetitionandRulesManual–ApprovedJanuary12,2017
2016.v.1.4
6.6.9.1.3.
TheUSCSACompetition/RulesCommittee(NationalEvents)
6.6.9.1.4.
6.6.9.2. The USCSA Competition and Rules Committee shall hear all protests
regarding national events. Any member of the USCSA Competition and
RulesCommitteewhomayhaveservedonthejurybeingprotested,orare
representativesofschoolsinvolvedtherein,shallbedisqualifiedfromthe
deliberationsonthatissue.
6.6.9.3. The appeal, in writing and with substantiating particulars, must
alwaysbesubmittedtotheappropriateappealsboard,ormailedthereto
within 14 days after the announcement of the previous decision on the
protests(notcountingtheannouncementday).
6.7. CancellationOfACompetition
6.7.1. The Jury has the right to cancel a competition if the safety of the
competitorsisendangeredoriftheproperconductofthecompetitioncannot
beguaranteed.
6.7.2. If,however,aprotestislodgedwiththeappropriateappealboardandupheld
by that board within 24 hours after cancellation of the race the whole
competitionmustberunagain.Ifthereisnoprotest,theraceiscanceled.
6.8. JointRegulations
6.8.1. Seeding
6.8.1.1. Participating full teams shall have one competitor placed in each of
the 5 seeds. The order of teams shall be generated by random selection
withineachseed.Thereshallbeseparatedrawsforeachevent;Slopestyle,
Halfpipe, and SkierCross time trials. All random selection draws by heat
may be processed electronically with software that produces the daily
seeds based on randomizing each heat individually, without bias to a
specificteam.Randomdrawcanalsobedonemanually,shouldcomputer
systemsforrandomizationbeunavailable.(SeeAlpineRulesSection3.3.3
forRandomDrawProcedures.).
6.8.1.2. The seeding of outstanding individual competitors (Regional’s and
Nationals)forSlopestyle,Halfpipe&SkierCrosstimetrialsshallbeplaced
between the first and second seed. The random selection of these
individual representatives shall be determined by draw at the seeding
meeting. (If the number of outstanding individual competitors outnumbertheteams,theywillbeseededintheteammanner.)
6.8.1.3. SpecialSkiCrossSeeding:TimesfromtheTimeTrailsareusedtoplace
racersinheats.Ifpossible,noathletesfromthesameteamshallbeinthe
same1stroundofheats.
6.8.1.4. Seeding for the second run of alternate competitors shall be at the
discretionoftheChiefofCompetition,tobeannouncedpriortotheevent.
81
2016-2017CompetitionandRulesManual–ApprovedJanuary12,2017
2016.v.1.4
6.8.2. Re-Runs
6.8.2.1. A competitor who is hindered during competition by the error of an
official,byaspectator,byananimal,orbyanyotherjustifiablecausescan
apply to any member of the Jury for a rerun immediately after the
occurrence of the interference. The team captain of the hindered
competitor can also make this claim. The competitor must leave the
courseimmediatelyaftertheinterferenceandmaynotridefurtherdown
thecourse.(DoesnotapplyinSkierCross.)
6.8.2.2.
GroundsforInterference:
6.8.2.2.1.
Blockingofthecoursebyanofficial,aspectator,ananimal,or
otherhindrance.
6.8.2.2.2.
Blockingofthecoursebyafallencompetitor,whodidnotclear
thecoursesoonenough.(DoesnotapplyinSkierCross.)
6.8.2.2.3.
Objects in the course such as equipment of a previous
competitor.(DoesnotapplyinSkierCross.)
6.8.2.2.4.
Activitiesofthefirstaidservicewhichhinderthecompetitor.
6.8.2.2.5.
Absenceofagateknockeddownbyapreviouscompetitor,and
notpromptlyreplaced.(DoesnotapplyinSkierCross.)
6.8.2.2.6.
Malfunction of the scoring system. Other similar incidents,
whichbeyondthewillandcontrolofthecompetitor,causesignificant
lossofspeedoraffectthecompetitor'sperformance.(Doesnotapply
inSkierCross.)
6.8.2.2.7.
Competitors who continue after an interference will lose the
righttoclaimarerun.(DoesnotapplyinSkierCross.)
6.8.2.3. If the competitor's explanation appears credible, a re-run shall be
grantedonconditionthatthereasonforitislaterconfirmedbytheJury.If
the competitor was already disqualified before the incident entitling
him/hertore-run,there-runisnotvalid.IncasetheRefereeorotherJury
membersareunabletoimmediatelyquestiontheappropriateofficialsto
judge the justification for the re-run, he/she may, to avoid delay for the
competitor,grantaprovisionalre-run.Thisre-runwillbevalidonlyifitis
confirmed by the Jury. The provisionally or definitively approved re-run
remainsvalidifitprovesslowerthanthefirst(original)run.Iftheclaim
forre-runisshowntobeunjustified,thecompetitorisdisqualified.
6.8.2.4. Re-runsshouldnotbegivenlightly.Jurymembersshouldpayspecial
attention of items in 7.02. After a competitor has already fallen or
otherwisedelayedhis/herrunsignificantly,he/shemaynotexpectarerunforthelossofafewadditionalsecondsduetoatardyreplyofagate
judgeorsimilarminordelay.Asaguideline,verycarefulscrutinymustbe
used whenever a re-run is requested after that competitor has already
delayedthemselvesthroughhis/hererror.
82
2016-2017CompetitionandRulesManual–ApprovedJanuary12,2017
2016.v.1.4
6.8.2.5. Start Time of the Rerun. The competitor may start after he/she has
reportedtothestartreferee,atthestartreferee'sdiscretion.
6.9. RulesSpecificToSkiercross(Skx)
6.9.1. ASkierCrossisacompetitionwhere,dependingonthenumberofathletesin
a race, cluster at the starting line together, and simultaneously ride down a
slope studded with various obstacles. The first two to cross the finish line
qualify for the next round of competition in this elimination format. The
numberofridersperroundwillbedecidedatthecoachesmeeting.
6.9.2. Inspection/TrainingofTheCourse
6.9.2.1. The Jury decides the method of inspection. The competitors are
allowedtoinspectthecoursebyslowlyslidingdownthroughoralongside
the course. Inspection times are at the discretion of the race Jury but
should be a minimum of 30 minutes. Competitors must carry their start
numbersandweartheirhelmets.
6.9.2.2. Trainingtimesoropenrunningofthecourseisatthediscretionofthe
race Jury but should be at least 30 minutes to allow all competitors the
opportunitytoridethroughthecourseaminimumofonetimebeforethe
officialstartofthecompetition.
6.9.2.3. The setting of the gates must be done before the official training.
Minoradjustmentsinthesettingmaybenecessaryduringthetrainingto
adjust the course for a smooth race line. Any changes made during
training should be announced in the start area so all competitors and
TeamCaptainsareawareofsuchchanges.
6.9.2.4. At least one official training run prior to the actual competition is
mandatory–normallythetrainingrunsshouldbe1-2hoursinlengthand
shouldbeheldthedaybeforetheactualeventtakesplace(undercertain
mitigatingcircumstancestheJurymaydecideotherpossibilities).
6.9.3. ExecutionofSkierCross
6.9.3.1. Formatsaredependentonthesizeofthefield,6ridersperheator4
ridersperheatorsuchothernumbersasdeterminedbytheJury.SkiCross
will be run according to a single knockout format. A timed run the day
prior to the actual competition is used to seed or qualify riders into the
final competition. Event Organizer or Jury may have the option to use a
bestoneoutoftwotimedtrials.
6.9.3.2. Any team that has seeded more than 5 athletes for the competition
will only be allowed to have their top 5 competitors advance to the
bracketedrounds(SeeSnowboardRulesSection5.9.8).Athletesdisplaced
byateamwithmorethan5athletesinthetimetrialwillbeusedtofillthe
remainingopenpositionsinthebracketedrounds.Allathletescompleting
atimetrialandnotadvancingtothefinalsshallbereorderedaccordingto
83
2016-2017CompetitionandRulesManual–ApprovedJanuary12,2017
2016.v.1.4
theirtimetrialresultsandplacedoutbeginningthenextnumericalplace
beyondthoseinthebrackets.
6.9.3.3. Riders advance as determined by their place of finish in each heat.
PlaceoffinishisdeterminedbythefirstpartofthebodyorSkithatcross
finishline.Wheneverpossible,afinishlinecamera(videoorphotofinish)
shouldbeavailable.Incaseofatieonlytheriderstiedforthefinalplaceof
advancementtothenextheatwillrunagaintodeterminewhoadvances.
6.9.3.4. All riders shall stop at Scoreboard in finish area to confirm their
placementwiththeChiefofFinish.
6.9.3.5. RaceBibs:Maybe4-6differentcolorsineachheatornumberedbibs
withnumbersonfront,backandsleevesforbettervisibilitybythecourse
judges.Coloredbibs,armbands,orhelmetcoversmayalsobeused.
6.9.3.6. Iftwoormorecompetitorsaretiedforthelastplacepositionleading
into the finals, then a ski-off will be held between the two or more
competitors, before the start of the SkierCross Final competition. The
competitorwhowinstherunwillqualifyandadvancetotheFinal.
6.9.4. TechnicalData
6.9.4.1. Courses for all SkierCross must be a minimum of 130 meters and a
maximumof250metersinverticaldrop.Averageslopeinclinationshould
be15-18degrees.Thecourseshouldnotincludesectionswheregradients
exceedmorethan22degreesforlengthsof45metersormore.
6.9.4.2. Gate Description: A SkierCross gate consists of one long slalom pole,
one stubby pole and one triangular banner. Consecutive gates must
alternate in color (except banana’s/delay gates). The slalom poles must
carrytriangularbannersmatchingthecolorofthepole.
6.9.4.3. Triangularbannersmustbeused.Theturningpolemustbeastubby
pole.ThetriangularbannersizemaybeeitherSlalomorGiantSlalom.Itis
recommendedtousetheGiantSlalomsizewheneverpossible.Triangular
bannersmustbeplacedatthebottomofthegate.
6.9.4.4. The gates must be set so that the competitors can distinguish them
clearlyandquicklyevenathighspeeds.Thebannerofagateshouldbeset
atrightanglestothecompetitionline.Incertaincircumstancesridersmay
be required to pass between two gates of the same colors (for example:
corridors).
6.9.4.5. Generalcharacteristicsofthecourses.Theslopeshouldpreferablybe
of a medium pitch (not flat/not steep-ideally 12-20 degrees) with varied
terrain. The SkierCross slope must be a minimum of 30 m wide. Under
certainconditionsforshortsections(50morless)thecoursewidthmay
beaminimumof10m.
6.9.4.5.1.
TheidealSkierCrossslopeallowsfortheconstructionofallor
some of the following terrain features: Banks (crescent shaped),
84
2016-2017CompetitionandRulesManual–ApprovedJanuary12,2017
2016.v.1.4
DoubleBanks,Single,Double,orTripleJumps,OllieJumps,Rollsand
waves - (Single, double, triple, etc.), Staircase Jumps, Spines and
doublespines,Prostylejumps,Obeliskorpyramids,Tabletopjumps,
andMediumorlongGStypeturns.
6.9.4.5.2.
Other terrain features can be built but safety considerations
must always be a priority. Gap jumps are not permitted under any
circumstances.
6.9.4.5.3.
TheidealSkierCrosscourseshouldbetechnicallychallenging,
consistingoffeaturessuitedtotheterrainlinkedbygatestocontrol
speedbuttestingthewidestvarietyofFreeskiingtechnique.
6.9.4.5.4.
It is recommended that gates not be set in the absence of a
feature.
6.9.4.6. Thefinishmustbenolessthan15meterswide.Inexceptionalcases,
theT.D.canonlydecreasethisdistancefortechnicalreasonsorbecauseof
the terrain. The width of the finish is considered to be the distance
betweenthetwofinishpostsofbanners.
6.9.4.7. CoursePreparation:Thetrackshouldbeclosedtothepublicatleast
24 hours before the training. Terrain features and jumps must be built
with sufficient time so that the snow has been compacted to insure that
theycanbeproperlymaintainedduringtrainingandcompetition.Theuse
of artificial means is permitted (salt, water, etc.). In places where the
riders may be in danger, protections (willy bags, mattresses, nets, etc.)
mustbeinstalled.
6.9.5. CourseSetting
6.9.5.1. Thesettingofthegatesmustbedonebeforetheofficialtrainingand
should incorporate the skillful use of the terrain with the integration of
terrain features and jumps into the setting. Minor adjustments in the
setting may be necessary during the training to adjust the course for a
smoothraceline.Anychangesmadeduringtrainingshouldbeannounced
inthestartareasoallcompetitorsandTeamCaptainsareawareofsuch
changes.
6.9.5.2. The total number of terrain features and jumps should be at the
discretion of the course designer but will incorporate as many different
possibilitiesasispractical.Blindjumpsorterrainfeatureswherearideris
unabletoseethelandingfromthetake-offshouldbeavoided.Thecourse
shouldbedesignedsoastoseparatetheridersasquicklyaspossibleafter
thestart(i.e.3-5rolls,mogulsorotherterrainfeaturesbetweenthestart
and the first turn). These terrain features should be placed in a straight
line from the start to the first turn. Minimum distance of the straight
section of the course between the start and the first turn should be 50
meters.Thestartshouldberelativelyflat(12-14°).
6.9.6. SixRiderFormat
85
2016-2017CompetitionandRulesManual–ApprovedJanuary12,2017
2016.v.1.4
Qualifier#1:Toptwofinishersineachheatadvancetothenextround.
QuarterFinal:4heatsof6.Top3ridersadvancetoSemi-Finals.
SemiFinal:2heatsof6.Top3ridersadvancetotheFinals.4-6fromeach
heatadvancetoConsolations.
ConsolationRound:1heatof6.Determinesfinalrank7-12.FinalRound:1
heatof6.Determinesfinalrank1-6.
Rank of all riders in the final round will be determined by head to head
competition.Ridersnotqualifiedforthefinalwillberankedaccordingto
qualifyingtimes.
6.9.7. FourRiderFormat
Qualifier#1:Top2finisher(s)ineachheatadvancetothenextround.
QuarterFinal:4heatsof4.Top2ridersadvancetoSemi-Finals.
SemiFinal:2 heats of 4. Top 2 riders advance to the Finals. 3 & 4 from
eachheatadvancetoConsolations.
ConsolationRound:1heatof4.Determinesfinalrank5-8.FinalRound:1
heatof4.Determinesfinalrank1-4.
Rank of all riders in the final round will be determined by head to head
competition.Ridersnotqualifiedforthefinalwillberankedaccordingto
qualifyingtimes.
6.9.8. SkierCrossPairings
Pairingsforthebracketedfinalroundswillbeaccordingtothefollowing:
Rankingfor8heats/4perheat(32)
Heat
#
1st
Position
2nd
Position
3rd
Position
4th
Position
1
1
16
24
32
2
8
9
17
25
3
6
11
19
27
4
4
13
21
29
5
3
14
22
30
6
5
12
20
28
7
7
10
18
26
8
2
15
23
31
86
2016-2017CompetitionandRulesManual–ApprovedJanuary12,2017
2016.v.1.4
Heat
#
1st
Position
2nd
Position
3rd
Position
4th
Position
1
1
8
12
16
2
4
5
9
13
3
3
6
10
14
4
2
7
11
15
Heat
#
1st
Position
2nd
Position
3rd
Position
4th
Position
5th
Position
6th
Position
1
1
16
24
32
40
48
2
8
9
17
25
33
41
3
6
11
19
27
35
43
4
4
13
21
29
37
45
5
3
14
22
30
38
46
6
5
12
20
28
36
44
7
7
10
18
26
34
42
8
2
15
23
31
39
47
Heat
#
1st
Position
2nd
Position
3rd
Position
4th
Position
5th
Position
6th
Position
1
1
8
12
16
20
24
2
4
5
9
13
17
21
3
3
6
10
14
18
22
4
2
7
11
15
19
23
6.9.9. TheStart
6.9.9.1. Thelanepositionisbasedoffqualifyingtime.Firstofthequalification
can chose their lane, the second fastest the next lane and so on in each
heat.Amissedstartisadisqualification.Itistherider'sresponsibilityto
arriveatthestartintimetoCompete.
6.9.9.2. For each heat the competitors choose their lane in order of their
qualifyingtime.
87
2016-2017CompetitionandRulesManual–ApprovedJanuary12,2017
2016.v.1.4
6.9.9.3. Startlanes.Eachstartingpositionisidentifiedbyanumber.Looking
downthecoursethepositionsaresetfromlefttoright.(Position1isvery
leftlookingdown-Position4/6isveryrightlookingdown)
6.9.10.
Contact.Intentionalcontactbypushing,pullingorothermeans,which
causesanothercompetitortoslowdown,fallorexitthecourse,isnotallowed
and is an automatic disqualification. Unavoidable "casual contact" may be
acceptable.Allcontactinfractionswillbeatthediscretionofthecoursejudges
andraceJury.
6.9.11.
Disqualifications/Protests
6.9.11.1. Disqualificationswillbeannouncedand/orpostedimmediatelyafter
eachheatatadesignatedareaatthebottomandtopofthecourse.
6.9.11.2. All protests must be reported to the Chief of Finish before the next
heatbegins.Protestsafterthistimewillnotbeaccepted.Protestsneednot
be in writing but all other rules for protests will apply. The Jury will
consistoftheT.D.,RaceDirectororChiefofCompetitionandtheChiefof
Finish. The protest fee must be paid before the conclusion of the
competition.
6.9.11.3. GateJudges.Between4-8GateJudges(withradiosconnectedwiththe
finish-referee) on a SkierCross is necessary. They must be familiar with
therules(Inspection,Training,Gate-DQ´sandContactetc.).
6.9.12.
Equipment
6.9.12.1. Thicknessofskibootsole.Thedistancebetweentheskibootsoleand
the base of the heel including all hard and soft parts: Women/Men:
Maximum43mm.
6.9.12.2. The maximum height (distance between the bottom of the running
surfaceoftheskiandskibootsole)is50mm.
6.9.12.3. Helmets. The competitors are required to wear helmets. Full face
helmets are recommended for all inspection, training, timed trials and
competition.
6.9.12.4. SkiSuits.Skisuitsmustbetwopieces.Pantsandaseparatetop.FormfittingLycra,speedordownhillsuitsarenotpermitted.Competitionsuits
may not be plasticized. Non-protruding body protection and padding is
recommended.
6.10. RulesSpecificToHalfpipe
6.10.1.
TechnicalData
6.10.1.1. The Halfpipe is a channel constructed in, or of the snow. The course
should be as even and as hard as possible. The use of artificial means is
permitted(salt,water,etc.)toaidincompaction.
6.10.1.2. RecommendedHalfpipeDimensions
88
2016-2017CompetitionandRulesManual–ApprovedJanuary12,2017
2016.v.1.4
Minimum
Recommended
Maximum
Inclination
16degrees
18degrees
20degrees
Length
100m
110m
120m
Width
14m
15m
16m
WallHeight
3.5m
4m
4.5m
TransitionRadius
4m
5m
6m
6.10.1.3. ExactDimensions
-Vertical0.3mat85degrees
-BottomFlat5monesnowcatwidth
-DropinArea4m
-Bannerfencefromwall2m
-Outsidefencefrombanners1m
6.10.2.
CourseSetting
6.10.2.1. TheHalfpipecoursemustconformtospecifications.
6.10.2.2. The Halfpipe course must be finished and ready for training at least
twohoursbeforethestartofcompetition.
6.10.2.3. The drop in area shall give the riders the opportunity to enter the
Halfpipewithspeedandshallnotbeusedtoattemptamaneuver.
6.10.2.4. The lips (tops of each wall) of the Halfpipe must be clearly marked
withcolor.
6.10.2.5. NofinishlineshouldbemarkedinaHalfpipe
6.10.3.
CompetitorTraining
6.10.3.1. Competitorsarenotrequiredtotrain.
6.10.3.2. Thereshallbenospecificstartorderduringtraining.
6.10.3.3. Training times will be communicated by the competition committee
duringtheteamcaptains'meeting.
6.10.4.
TheStart
6.10.4.1. TheHeadJudgeshallcommunicatetothestarterwhenthejudgesare
readyforthenextcompetitor.
6.10.4.2. First Run: For all Halfpipe competition, the start order is as follows:
The start order for the group is created by random draw of all
competitors,withthewomenstartingfirst.(SeeAlpineRulesSection3.3.3
forRandomDrawProcedures.)
6.10.4.3. Second Run: The start order for the second run will be in the same
start order as the first. When in heats, this takes place in the same heat
89
2016-2017CompetitionandRulesManual–ApprovedJanuary12,2017
2016.v.1.4
rightafterthelastridergoes.Ifthereisafinalinthecompetitionthenthe
finalcompetitorswillstartinreverseorderfromtheirqualifyingscores.
6.10.4.4. Use of Heats in Halfpipe Competitions. Competitors can be run in
heatsof20-30whenappropriatebreaksoccurintheformationofthestart
list. During breaks, they would be given a 30 minute practice and then
taketheirtwoscoredruns.
6.10.4.5. Start Signal. After the starter has received acknowledgment for the
nextcompetitorfromtheHeadJudge,thestarterwillgivethecommand,
"Ready", "Go" to the competitor. The competitor may leave the start at
anytimeafterthecommand.
6.10.5.
Qualifications. Competition format will be clearly defined at the
Captains/Ridersmeetingbythejury.
6.10.6.
Helmets. Helmets manufactured for ski sports are required for all
competitorsinHalfpipecompetitionandofficialtraining.
6.10.7.
Judges’Stand
6.10.7.1. The minimum size of the scaffolding area must be 8 meters by 2
meters.Thejudges'viewingareashouldbeconstructedtoprovideample
roomfortheappropriatenumberofjudgesandprovideroomforviewing
andallproperamenitiesfortheoperationofthecompetition.
6.10.7.2. Thejudges'areashouldbefencedorprotectedfromcompetitorsand
spectators.
6.10.7.3. No competitor, team representative or spectator may approach the
judges'standorspeakwiththejudgesduringcompetition.
6.10.7.4. 6.10.8.
JudgingandScoring
6.10.8.1. ScoringParameters
6.10.8.1.1.
OnlymaneuversperformedintheHalfpipewillbescored.
6.10.8.1.2. Each judge shall use a ten point system. Judges will score by
onesandtenths;3.8,6.7,7.3etc.
6.10.8.1.3. The score card shall be used to record the score given by the
judge.
6.10.8.1.4. A memory board shall be used by each judge to make all
necessarynotationsdepictingeachcompetitor'srun.
6.10.8.1.5. IfacompetitorlandsoutoftheHalfpipe,theyhavetenseconds
tore-enterbeforetheyaredisqualified.
6.10.8.1.6.
Eachcompetitor'sscoresmustbepostedaftereachrun.
6.10.8.2. JudgingFormat
90
2016-2017CompetitionandRulesManual–ApprovedJanuary12,2017
2016.v.1.4
6.10.8.2.1.
3-6judgescanbeusedatUSCSAHalfpipeevents.
6.10.8.2.2. When three judges are present there will be a total of 40
points.
6.10.8.2.2.1.
Thejudgingdutiesareasfollows:
•
One judge giving a separate score for standard airs and
rotation
•
Onejudgeforamplitude
•
OnejudgeforOI.
6.10.8.2.3. When four judges are present each judge will evaluate a
specific category, standard airs, rotations, amplitude, and overall
impressionforatotalof40points.
6.10.8.2.4. When five judges are present, three judges will evaluate and
score a specific category: standard airs, rotations, amplitude, and
therewillbetwooverallimpressionjudgesforatotalof50points.
6.10.8.2.5. When six judges are present, three judges will evaluate and
score a specific category: standard airs, rotations, amplitude, and
therewillbethreeoverallimpressionjudgesforatotalof60points.
6.10.8.3. Judging Criteria. The value for each run will be based on the judges'
evaluationofthefollowingcriteria.
6.10.8.3.1. StandardAirs:Theseincludeallairsortricksthatarelessthan
360degrees.Thebasickindsofstandardairsallgroupedintooneof
the following: straight airs, air to fakie/fakie to forward, alley oop
airs, straight switch stance airs, 180 hand plants and lip tricks less
than 360 degrees. In able to score a high variety, a rider should
includeamaneuverfromasmanysub-groupsaspossible.
For example, performing different backside airs with grabs shows a
good variety, but including a switch stance air, an alley oop air, and
an air to fakie, shows a much greater range of variety as well as
increasing the difficulty. Plus if the tricks are performed well, it
increasesyourscoreforexecution.
Thegrabshouldbesolidandsmooth,thelegsandbodymaneuvered
into the appropriate position, and then the grab released, all in one
fluidmotion.
Emphasis for judging will be the variety, difficulty, and execution of
tricks in the category. Falls occurring during any attempted
maneuverwithinthiscategoryshallbefactoredintothescore.
91
2016-2017CompetitionandRulesManual–ApprovedJanuary12,2017
2016.v.1.4
6.10.8.3.2. Rotations: These are all maneuvers that include a rotation of
360 degrees or more. Rotations can be separated into sub-groups
including horizontal rotations (720 spin), vertical rotations (back
flip),andhybrids(wetcat,inverted900).
A key point: A grabbed 540 is certainly better than a 540 without a
grab. A higher score means doing maneuvers that are more
dissimilar,suchas,a540,a720,aMcTwist,inverted7or9.Execution
forrotationsmeanssmooth,precise,andundercontrolrotating.
Higher difficulty may be added by including stalling or off axis
combinationsandaddinganextrahalforfullrotation.
Emphasis for judging will be the variety, difficulty, and execution of
tricks in the category. Falls occurring during any attempted
maneuverwithinthiscategoryshallbefactoredintothescore.
6.10.8.3.3. Amplitude: Measures the height of the maneuvers. Amplitude
isdistancemeasuredfromthelipofthepipetotherider'scenterof
mass.Theamplitudescoreisderivedfromthesumofallhits,divided
by the number of hits taken. The value of each hit is equal to the
number of feet between the lip of the pipe and the rider's center of
mass (either above or below the lip) added to the point value
assignedtothelip.
ThelipvalueshallbedeterminedbytheHeadJudgeandAmplitude
Judge based on observations made during practice. The purpose of
this floating value is to ensure consistency in scoring levels among
the different criteria and to have a relative value for both men and
womencompetitors.
6.10.8.3.4. Overall Impression: The OI judge is looking at how a rider
designshis/herruntoshowavarietyoftricksthatarewellexecuted
and difficult. If a rider is getting high scores from the other judges,
theywilldoequallyaswellinthiscriterion.Allphasesofeachtrick
areevaluatedbytheOIjudges.
Thejudgeswillscoretherunbyevaluatingtherun'soverallprecision
includingtheexecutionoftherunandtheroutineattempted.
Theoverallimpressionjudgeevaluatestheprecisenatureoftherun
in relation to maneuvers attempted, both individually and as a
92
2016-2017CompetitionandRulesManual–ApprovedJanuary12,2017
2016.v.1.4
sequenceandlooksatline,theuseofthepipe,amplitudeinrelation
tothetricksandoverallflowinthepipe.
TheoverallcompositionoftherunisthemostimportantastheO.I.
judge evaluates the sequences of tricks, the amount of risk in the
routineandtheprogressionofnewmaterialinthepipe.TheOverall
Impressionjudgedoestakefallsintoconsideration.
6.10.9.
Tie-breaking
6.10.9.1. Best of Two formats: If a tie exists, the rider with the highest score
fromtheotherrunshallbedeclaredthewinner.
6.10.9.2. IfbothrunsaretiedthenacomparisonoftheOIjudgesshallbeused.
ThecompetitorwiththehighestcombinedOIscoresfrombothrunsshall
bedeclaredthewinner.
6.10.9.3. IfalltheOIjudgesaretiedtheamplitudescoreswillbecomparedfor
bothrunsandthehighesttotalshallbedeterminedthewinner.
6.11. RulesSpecifictoSlopestyle
6.11.1.
CourseMeasurement
6.11.1.1. Averageslopeinclinationshouldbe12degrees
6.11.1.2. TheSlopestylecoursemustbeaminimumof30meterswide
6.11.1.3. Course for all Slopestyle must be a minimum of 150 Meters and a
maximumof200Metersinverticaldrop.
6.11.1.4. Thecourseshouldnotincludesectionswheregradientsexceedmore
than20degreesforlengthsof50metersormore.
6.11.1.5. The slope should preferably be of moderate pitch, not flat and not
steepideally10to15degrees.
6.11.2.
CourseDescription
6.11.2.1. A Slopestyle course shall contain a variety of hits, with two or more
linesthatthecompetitormaychoosetoperform.
6.11.2.2. ASlopestylecoursemusthaveaminimumofsixfeatures,notfavoring
regularorgoofyfootriders,whichshallinclude,atleast2tabletopjumps
orfunboxes,2quarterpipes,andtwootherformsofterrainparkfeatures
whichcouldincludewaves,rails,spinesorotherapprovedfeatures.
6.11.2.3. The ideal slopestyle allows for the construction of all the features to
be used both by male and female competitors. All competitors shall run
thesamecourseforofficialscoring.
6.11.2.4. Other terrain features can be built but safety considerations must
alwaysbeapriority.
93
2016-2017CompetitionandRulesManual–ApprovedJanuary12,2017
2016.v.1.4
6.11.2.5. The ideal Slopestyle course should be technically challenging, with a
widevarietyoffeaturesindiversecombinations.Thecoursemusthavea
smoothflowwithabalanceoffeatures,andallowtheriderstoset-upfor
thenextfeature.
6.11.3.
CompetitorTraining.Trainingtimesoropenrunningofthecourseis
at the discretion of the competition jury but depending on the size of field
shouldbeatleast30-60minutestoallowallcompetitorstheopportunityto
ridethroughthecourseaminimumoftwotimesbeforetheofficialstartofthe
competition.
6.11.4.
TheStart
6.11.4.1. Thestartorderwillbedeterminedbythecompetitionjuryandwillbe
announced at the Team Captains/Rider Meeting the night prior to
competition.
6.11.4.2. TheHeadJudgeshallcommunicatetothestarterwhenthejudgesare
readyforthenextcompetitor.
6.11.5.
Execution of Slopestyle Format. Competition format will be clearly
definedattheCaptains/Ridersmeetingbythejury.
6.11.6.
Equipment.
6.11.6.1. Helmets. Helmets manufactured for ski sports are required for all
competitorsinSlopestylecompetitionandofficialtraining.
6.11.6.2. LossofSkis.Ifacompetitorlosesaski,he/shemayfinishononeski.
The competitor will be judged according to their performance. If the
competitordoesnotcontinuetherunandfailstoputtheirskibackonina
10secondtimelimit,theywillbejudgeduptothatpoint.Ifacompetitor
losesbothskis,theywillbejudgeduptothatpoint.Ifacompetitorstops
intheSlopestyleformorethan10seconds,thecompetitorwillbescored
uptothatpoint.Thecompetitorshouldexitthepipeassoonaspossible.
6.11.7.
Judges’Stand
6.11.7.1. The minimum size of the scaffolding area must be 8 meters by 2
meters.
6.11.7.2. The judges' viewing area should be constructed to provide ample
roomfortheappropriatenumberofjudgesandprovideroomforviewing
andallproperamenitiesfortheoperationofthecompetition.
6.11.7.3. Thejudgesstandneedstobeelevatedandcenteredalongthesideof
the course to view the complete slopestyle course. If this is not possible
then two judging stands need to be constructed as the judging crew will
needtobesplituptoviewthecourse.
6.11.7.4. Thejudges'areashouldbefencedorprotectedfromcompetitorsand
spectators.
94
2016-2017CompetitionandRulesManual–ApprovedJanuary12,2017
2016.v.1.4
6.11.7.5. No competitor, team representative or spectator may approach the
judges'standorspeakwiththejudgesduringcompetition.
6.11.8.
SlopestyleJudging
6.11.8.1. SlopestylejudgingshallbedoneusingOverallImpression.
6.11.8.2. In Slopestyle, the run's overall precision will be evaluated, including
theexecutionoftherunandthelineattempted.Theoverallcomposition
oftheruniskey;thesequencesoftricks,the
6.11.8.3. amountofriskintheroutine,theprogressionofnewtricksandusing
theslopestylefeatures.
6.11.8.4. ThethreemainelementsintheSlopestylejudgingaretrickdifficulty,
execution,andamplitudeforeachtrickintheslopestylerun.Fallsarepart
ofexecutionandwillbetakenintoconsiderationoneverytrick.
6.11.8.5. When two to four judges are judging Overall Impression, all scores
willcount.beaveragedforthecompetitor’sscore.count.
6.11.8.6. WhenfivejudgesarejudgingOverallImpression,thehighestandthe
lowestscoreswillbethrownoutandthethreeremainingscoresmaymay
will be added together added together averaged for the competitor's
score.
6.11.9.
Scoring
6.11.9.1. TheHeadJudgewillannouncewhichscoringsystemwillbeusedfor
thecompetitionduringthefirstTeamCaptains'/Riders'meeting.
6.11.9.2. Overall Scoring System. The judges score each run based on the
OverallImpressioncategory.Thescoreofeachjudgeisbetween0and10
usingonedecimalor0and100.
6.11.9.3. RankingSystem.Thejudgeslookatalloftherunsandnotedownthe
trick names, difficulty, amplitude and landing. According to their
impressions and using their notes, they will make a personal ranking of
thecompetitorsattheendoftheround.Pointswillbegivenaccordingto
thecompetitor'splacement(1.Place=1point,2.Place=2points,a.s.o.)
To determine the final ranking, the points of all the judges are added up
andthewinneristheriderwiththelowestpoints.
6.12. CausesForDisqualification
6.12.1.
Anindividualcompetitormaybedisqualifiedifhe/she:
6.12.1.1. Isnotqualifiedaccordingtoamateurruling.
6.12.1.2. Participatesinthecompetitionunderfalsepretenses.
6.12.1.3. Trains on a course closed to competitors, alters the course in a
mannerforbiddenoractscontrarytotheinstructionsoftheJuryastothe
executionofthetrainingorthecompetition.
95
2016-2017CompetitionandRulesManual–ApprovedJanuary12,2017
2016.v.1.4
6.12.1.4. Appearslateatthestart,makesafalsestart,missesastart,orviolates
theregulationsforstarting.
6.12.1.5. Acceptsoutsidehelpinanyformduringthecompetition.Outsidehelp
consists of, but is not limited to, another person, course equipment and
polesthatmakeupthecourse.
6.12.1.6. Fails to give way to an overtaking competitor at the first call or
interfereswiththeirrun.(DoesnotapplyinSkierCross).
6.12.1.7. Failstopassthroughagatecorrectly.Agatehasbeenpassedcorrectly
whenboththecompetitor’sskitipsandbothfeethavepassedacrossthe
gateline.Ifacompetitorlosesaskiwithoutcommittingafault,e.g.notby
straddling a pole, then the top of the remaining ski and both feet must
havepassedthegateline.Incaseofafall,theridermustpassthroughthe
turningline.Acompetitorwhoknowinglyhasnotcorrectedamissedgate
may not continue through further gates for a start in the second run, or
advanceintheSkierCross.
6.12.1.8. Losesaskimorethantwogatesabovethefinish.
6.12.1.9. In the event that a competitor removes a pole from its vertical
position before the competitor's ski tips and both feet have passed the
gateline,theskitipsandfeetmuststillpasstheoriginalgateline(marks
in the snow). This is also valid in the case of a missing turning pole (or
gate).
6.12.1.10.Does not wear the official start number (bibs) or alters it in a
prohibitedmanner.
6.12.1.11.Doesnotcomplywiththesafetyregulations.
6.12.1.12.Doesnotcomplywiththeregulationsforsponsorshipandequipment
(SeeFreeskiRulesSection6.9.4.)
6.12.1.13.Interruptsordisturbsanothercompetitorduringhis/herrun.
6.12.1.14.Unsportsmanlikeconduct-swearing,maliciouslyknockingdowngates
ortearingupthecourse.
6.12.1.15.ContactinSkierCross.Intentionalcontactbypushing,pullingorother
means, which causes another competitor to slow down, fall or exit the
course is not allowed and is an automatic disqualification. Unavoidable
”casual contact” may be acceptable. All contact infractions will be at the
discretionofthecoursejudgesandracejury.
6.13. OrganizingCommitteeAndItsDuties
6.13.1.
If the organizing club or association does not act as organizing
committee it will designate an organizing committee. The organizing
committeewillappointacompetitioncommitteeforalltechnicalmattersand
make the necessary preparations and directly carry out the running of the
competitionattheresort.
96
2016-2017CompetitionandRulesManual–ApprovedJanuary12,2017
2016.v.1.4
6.13.2.
The organizing committee must assume all responsibility to ensure
that the details involved in hosting competitions are properly controlled. The
importance of efficient communication with all individuals and participating
teamsisessentialtoawell-plannedcompetition.
6.13.3.
The organizing committee should provide an announcement that
providestoallparticipantsandguestsmaterialsonaccommodationandtravel
details.
6.13.4.
The Organizing Committee is responsible for providing results to
individuals participating in the competition immediately following the
competition.
6.14. CompetitionCommittee,CompetitionOfficialsAndTheirDuties
6.14.1.
TheCompetitionCommitteeiscomposedofthefollowing:
•
TheChiefofCompetition
•
TheChiefofCourse
•
TheChiefofTimingandCalculation
•
TheChiefGateJudge(giantslalom)HeadJudge(SkierCross)
•
ChiefofFinishforSkierCross)
•
TheCompetitionSecretary
6.14.2.
The Competition Committee appoints all additional Officials not
alreadydesignated.
6.14.3.
The Competition Committee is responsible for all technical matters,
includingtheselectionandpreparationofthecourses.
6.14.4.
TheChiefofCompetitiondirectsandcontrolstheworkofallOfficials,
summons the meetings of the Competition Committee for consideration of
technical questions and generally acts as chairperson of the team officers
meetings,afterconsultationwiththeTechnicalDelegate(TD).
6.14.5.
The Chief of Timing and Calculation is responsible for the
coordinationofofficialsatthestartandfinish,includingtimingandcalculation.
In giant slalom, he/she or a special assistant will decide the interval between
starts. The following officials are under his/her direction: Starter, Assistant
Starter, Start Recorder, Chief Time Keeper, Assistant Time Keepers, Finish
Controller,ChiefofCalculationandhis/herassistants.
6.14.6.
TheChiefofCourseisresponsibleforthepreparationsofthecourse
in accordance with the decisions of the Competition Committee and the Jury.
He/shemustbefamiliarwithlocalsnowconditionsontheterrainconcerned.
6.14.7.
TheCourseSetter,whomayalsoactasChiefofCourse,isresponsible
forthesettingofgatesfortheSkierCrosscourse.Coursesettersareappointed
bytheJury.He/shemustgiveexclusiveprioritytothesafetyofthecompetitor.
97
2016-2017CompetitionandRulesManual–ApprovedJanuary12,2017
2016.v.1.4
Whereespeciallybadweatherandsnowconditionswarrant,theJurymaytake
measurestosafeguardthecompetitors.TheCourseSetter’sworkisotherwise
supervisedbytheChiefofCourseandbytheJury.
6.14.8.
TheChiefGateJudge(SkierCross)organizesandsupervisesthework
ofthegatejudges.He/Shedesignatesthegateseachwillsuperviseandplaces
them in position. At the end of the Time Trials runs and at the end of the
competition, he/she will collect the gate judges' control cards for delivery to
theReferee.He/Shemustdistribute,ingoodtimetoeachgatejudge,necessary
materials (control card, pencil, start list, etc.) and be prepared to offer
assistanceduringtheevent.e.g.,keepingthespectatorsoffthecourse,helping
maintain the course, etc. He/She must make sure the numbering and the
markingofthegatesisdonewithintherequiredtime.
6.14.9.
TheHeadJudgeorganizesandsupervisesthefreestylejudges.He/She
designatesthecategoryeachjudgewillevaluateandsupervisestheirconduct
onthejudges'stand.Attheendofthefirstrun,theHeadJudgewillcollectall
thescorecardsanddeliverthemtotheChiefofCalculation.He/Shewillcheck
tomakesureeachjudge'sscoresareinrangewiththeothers.He/Shewilloffer
assistance to the judges when necessary to keep spectators and competitors
awayfromthejudges'stand.
6.14.10.
GateJudges’ObligationsandDuties
6.14.10.1.Gate judges observe the passage of competitors through the gates.
Eachgatejudgemusthaveathoroughknowledgeofthecompetitionrules.
Thegatejudge'sdecisionmustbeclearandnonpartisan.His/Herconduct
must be calm, watchful and prudent. In case of a doubt, the gate judge
should give the competitor the benefit of doubt. The gate judge must
declare a fault only when he/she is convinced that a fault has been
committed.
6.14.10.2.In case of a protest, he/she must be able to explain clearly and
definitivelyhowthefaultwascommitted.
6.14.10.3.Ifthegatejudgeisindoubtwhetherafaulthasoccurred,he/shemust
makeacarefulinvestigation.He/Shecanconsulttheadjacentgatejudgein
ordertoconfirmhis/hernotes.He/Shecanevendemand,viaamemberof
the Jury, that the race be briefly interrupted so he/she may check the
tracksonthecourse.
6.14.10.4.The opinions of the public cannot be allowed to influence the gate
judges'judgment.Likewise,theymaynotaccepttheopinionsofwitnesses,
eventhoughtheymaybeexperiencedones.
6.14.10.5.The responsibility of the gate judge begins with the competitor
approachingthefirstgatetheycontrolandendswhenthecompetitorhas
passedthroughthelastgateundertheirjurisdiction.
6.14.10.6.ResponsibilitytotheCompetitor:Acompetitor,incaseofanerrorora
fall, can turn to the gate judge and question him or her. The gate judge
98
2016-2017CompetitionandRulesManual–ApprovedJanuary12,2017
2016.v.1.4
must inform the competitor if he/she has committed a fault that would
lead to disqualification. With a clear, decisive voice, the gate judge
answersthecompetitor'squestionwithoneofthefollowingwords:-"Go!"
if the competitor should expect no disqualification, since the gate judge
has ruled the gate passage as correct; -"Back!" if the competitor may
expect disqualification. The competitor is fully responsible for his/her
actionand,inthisrespect,cannotholdthegatejudgeliable.
6.14.10.7.In accordance with the instructions given by the Jury, the Chief Gate
Judge(orassistantgatejudge)collectsallthegatecards,andthenpasses
them on to the Referee. At the conclusion of the first run, the Chief Gate
Judgedistributesthegatecardsforthesecondrun.
6.14.10.8.Each gate judge who has recorded a disqualifying fault or who has
been witness to an incident leading to a rerun must be available to the
Juryuntilafterthesettlementofanyprotests.Itistheresponsibilityofthe
T.D.todismissagatejudgewhoiswaitingtobecalledbytheJury.
6.14.10.9.Other duties: Replace gate poles vertically (a leaning pole can aid or
hinderacompetitor).Replaceknockedoutpolesintheirexactpositions;
thepositionismarkedbythedyeinthesnow.Replace,ifpossible,tornor
missing flags or banners. Replace broken gate poles according to color
(blueorred);thepiecesofbrokenpolesmustbestoredinawaythatwill
notendangercompetitorsorspectators.Maintainandrepairtheirsection
ofthecourse.Keepthecourseclear.
6.14.10.10.
InthecaseofSkierCrossallGateJudgesmustbeequippedwith
radios to ensure communication to the chief of finish during the whole
competition.
6.14.11.
ChiefofFinish –SkierCross.Thechiefoffinishisresponsibleforthe
organization and supervision of the finish line Judges. The chief of finish will
accept protests in the finish area. The chief of finish must report all protests
immediatelytotheotherJurymembersimmediately.
6.14.12.
JudgingProcedure-SkierCross
6.14.12.1.Each judge will use scorecards, which indicate who the judge is, and
thebibnumberofthecompetitor.Allscorecardswillindicateaplacefor
eachcompetitorineachraceorheat.
6.14.12.2.No competitor or spectator will be allowed to approach the judges
areaandtalktothejudgesduringcompetition.
6.14.12.3.JudgesforSkierCrossmustdeterminetheorderoffinishforeachrace
orheatandcommunicatethefinishorderdirectlytothechiefoffinish.
6.14.12.4.ForSkierCrosstheremustbeaminimumoffourjudges.
6.14.12.5.The Competition Secretary is responsible for all secretarial work for
thetechnicalaspectsofthecompetitionandamongothersforpreparation
ofthedrawandthestartorder.TheSecretarymustensurethattheofficial
99
2016-2017CompetitionandRulesManual–ApprovedJanuary12,2017
2016.v.1.4
results contain the information required by the organizing Competition
Committee. He/she is responsible for the minutes of the Competition
Committee,Jury,andteamofficersmeetings.He/shemustensurethatall
formsforstart,finish,timing,calculationandgatejudgingandjudgingare
well prepared and handed over to the officials concerned in good order
and at the proper time. The Secretary receives any official protests and
gives them to those who are concerned. He/she must facilitate the
calculationofresultsbyappropriatepreparation,andensurethattheyare
duplicatedandpublishedasquicklyaspossibleafterthecompletionofthe
competition.
6.15. CompositionandDutiesoftheCompetitionJury
6.15.1.
CompositionoftheHalfpipe&SlopestyleJury
TechnicalDelegate
ChiefofCompetition
CompetitionReferee
HeadJudge
6.15.2.
CompositionoftheSkierCrossJury
TechnicalDelegate
ChiefofCompetition
CompetitionReferee
HeadJudge
ChiefofFinish
6.15.3.
The Technical Delegate and Head Judge are appointed by the
organizing committee. The Referee is selected by the Technical Delegate. A
competitormaynotbeamemberoftheJury.
6.15.4.
Voting: The Technical Delegate is chairman of the Jury. He/She
conductstheJurymeetings.Eachofthefollowingmembershasonevoteinthe
Jury:
•
T.D.
•
ChiefofCompetition
•
Refereeand/orChiefofFinish
6.15.5.
Decisionsaremadebysimplemajorityvoteofmemberspresentand
voting.Inthecaseofatie,theT.D.caststhedecidingvote.
6.15.6.
DutiesoftheJury
6.15.6.1. The Jury monitors the adherence to the rules throughout the entire
competition,includingtheofficialtraining.
100
2016-2017CompetitionandRulesManual–ApprovedJanuary12,2017
2016.v.1.4
6.15.6.2. From a technical standpoint particularly by: checking the set course,
checking the snow conditions on and beside the course, checking the
preparation of the course, approving the use of snow compactors and
other chemicals, checking the crowd control systems, checking the start,
thefinishandthefinishoutrun,checkingthefirstaidservice,appointing
thecoursesetters,settingthetimeofcoursesetting,overseeingthework
ofthecoursesetters,checkingthefasteningofthegateflags,astotherisk
of injury, opening or closing the competition courses for training in
consideration of the technical preparations and the prevailing weather
conditions,determiningthemannerofcourseinspection,inspectionofthe
coursebeforethecompetition,determiningthenumberofforerunnersfor
each run and setting the start order of the forerunners, debriefing the
forerunners, changing the start order in consideration of course
conditions,inextraordinaryconditions,changingthestartintervals,giving
instructions to and obtaining information from the gate judges, checking
thejudgesstandandthejudgesworkingconditions.
6.15.6.3. QuestionsnotcoveredbyRules:Ingeneral,theJurytakesdecisionson
allquestionsnotclarifiedbytherules.
6.15.7.
TheTechnicalDelegate(T.D.)
6.15.7.1. Responsibilities.TheprimarydutiesoftheT.D.aretomakesurethat
therulesanddirectionsofsnowboardarefollowed,toseetheeventruns
smoothly,toadvisetheorganizers,withinthescopeoftheirduties.
6.15.7.1.1.
101
Beforethecompetition,theT.D.:
•
inspects the competition and training courses and checks on
thesafetymeasurestaken.
•
controls the fastening of the gate flags which may constitute
anyriskofinjurytothecompetitor.
•
collaboratesintheadministrativeandtechnicalpreparations.
•
checksonthepresenceofsufficientradiosforallmembersof
the Jury.checks courses with regard to preparation, marking,
crowdcontrol,aswellasthelayoutofstartandfinishareas.
•
supervisesthecoursesettingtogetherwiththeJury.
•
checks the location of towers and sees they are adequately
protected.
•
checks all technical installations such as timekeeping, hand
timing,communications,judgesstand,transportofpeople,etc.
•
takespartinallmeetingsoftheJuryandoftheteamcaptains.
•
workscloselywiththeofficialsoftheOrganizingCommittee.
2016-2017CompetitionandRulesManual–ApprovedJanuary12,2017
2016.v.1.4
•
6.15.7.1.2.
Duringthecompetition,theT.D.:
•
keeps watch on whether the valid rules and directives are
obeyed in regard to advertising, etc., on clothing and race
equipment.
•
keeps watch on the technical and organizational conduct of
theevent.
•
punishesbreachesoftherules.
6.15.7.1.3.
6.15.8.
hastheright,ifaneventcannotbecarriedoutontheselected
course because of "force majeure", to move the event to a
substitute course proposed by the organizer. This, on the
explicit condition that the necessary safety measures can be
fulfilled.
Afterthecompetition,theT.D.
•
helps with the compilation of the Referee's disqualification
report.
•
presentsproperlysubmittedproteststotheJuryfordecision.
Referees(alpineevents)
6.15.8.1. TheteamcaptainsappointtheRefereeandassistantreferee.
6.15.8.2. Incriticalcases,especiallythoseinvolvingdangertothecompetitors,
the directions of the T.D. are also binding for the Referee and assistant
referee. In particular, prerequisites should be established by the T.D.
togetherwiththereferees,toensurethebestpossibletechnicalrunningof
acompetition.
6.15.8.3. DutiesoftheRefereeandAssistantReferee:
102
•
Drawingstartnumbers,ifnecessary.
•
Inspection of the course immediately after it is set, alone or
accompaniedbymembersoftheJury.
•
Changing the course by removing or adding gates; if the Referee
inspectsthecoursealone,hisdecisionisfinal.Thecoursesettermustbe
informedofsuchchanges,ifhe/shewasnotpresentatthisinspection.
•
Receiving the reports of the start and finish referees and the
competition officials about the infractions of the rules and the gate
faultsattheendofthefirstrun,andagainattheendofthecompetition.
•
Checking,signingandpostingtheReferee'sminutes,immediatelyafter
eachrun,ontheofficialnoticeboardandalsoatthefinish.Theminutes
should include the names of the competitors disqualified, the gate
numbers where the faults occurred, the names of the gate judges who
2016-2017CompetitionandRulesManual–ApprovedJanuary12,2017
2016.v.1.4
noted the faults leading to the disqualifications and the exact time the
disqualificationswereposted.
6.15.8.4. Collaboration with the T.D. The Referee and the assistant referee
mustworkverycloselywiththeT.D.Theassistantrefereecansubstitute
fortheReferee,ifnecessary.
6.15.8.5. StartReferee.Thestartrefereemustremainatthestartthroughout
training and competition. He/She must make sure the rules for starting
andthestartorderareproperlyobserved.
•
He/Shedetermineslateandfalsestarts.
•
He/She determines the violations against the rules for equipment
andimmediatelytakesthemeasuresprovidedforbytherules.
•
At the end of the competition, he/she reports to the Referee the
namesofthecompetitorswhodidnotstart,havemadefalseorlate
startsorotherinfringements.
6.15.8.6. Finish Referee. The finish referee must remain at the finish
throughouttrainingandcompetition.He/Shemustmakesurethatandthe
rulesforfinishingareproperlyobserved.
6.15.9.
•
He/She supervises the finish controller, the timing and the crowd
controlinthefinisharea.
•
He/Shemustbeabletocommunicate,immediately,withthestart
atalltime.
•
ThefinishrefereemustreporttotheRefereeimmediatelyafterthe
competition.
StartandFinishOfficials
6.15.9.1. TheStarter.ForSkierCrossevents,thestartermusthaveradiocontact
with the Head Judge during training and competition. The starter is
responsibleforthewarningsignalandthestartcommand,aswellasfor
the accuracy of the intervals between these signals. He/She assigns the
supervisionofthecompetitorstotheassistantstarter.
6.15.9.2. Chief Timekeeper (SkierCross Time Trials). The Chief Timekeeper is
responsible for the accuracy of the timing. He/She synchronizes the
watcheswiththestarterasshortlybeforeandafterthecompetitionasis
possible.He/Shemustpublishunofficialtimesasquicklyaspossible(on
the scoreboard). If the electronic timing fails, the chief timekeeper must
communicateimmediatelywiththestartrefereeandtheT.D.
6.15.9.3. Finish Controller / Chief of Finish (SkierCross) The finish controller
hasthefollowingduties:
103
•
Supervisionofthefinish.
•
Supervisionofthepropercrossingofthefinishline.
2016-2017CompetitionandRulesManual–ApprovedJanuary12,2017
2016.v.1.4
•
104
Recordingthefinishingorderofallcompetitorswhocompletethe
course.
2016-2017CompetitionandRulesManual–ApprovedJanuary12,2017
2016.v.1.4
7.0 SECTION7–SCORINGRULES
7.1. FourEventScoring
7.1.1. Team scoring for the “President’s Award” for 4-way performance is
accomplished by using the point by place scoring system for slalom, giant
slalom and in Even Years; the Individual Classical race and the Relay (FR, FR,
FR),inOddYears;theIndividualFreestylefaceandtheRelay(CL,CL,CL.)For
scoringtheNordicrelay,seeSection7.2below.Toobtainthefour-eventtotal,
addthepointsforeachoftheeventsasindicated.
7.1.2. DefinitionofPointbyPlaceScoring(FourWayPoints)
7.1.2.1. Teamfinishplacesaredeterminedbythesumofplacementpointsof
three (3) best individual team members. Five (5) racers per team count
towardscoring.(InNordiceventswheremorethanfive(5)athletesmay
beentered,racersfinishing6th,7th,8th,etc.foreachteamdonotscoreor
displacepointsforteamscoring).Scoringwillbeassessedasfollows:
1stPlace–OnePoint
2ndPlace–TwoPoints
3rdPlace–ThreePoints,etc.
7.1.2.2. When at least three team members fail to finish, the Four Way team
scoringprocedureistousethetotalfinishnumberplusoneasthepoints
scoredbyeachnon-finishingteammember.
7.1.3. Fourwaypointsarenottobeawarded(ordisplaced)bytheindividualswho
arenotdesignatedasmembersofteamsenteredinthecompetition
7.1.3.1. Ifbib#10finishes5thintheresults,he/shewillreceivefive(5)place
points for the individual team event. However, if he/she is 1st in the
results as a 4-way invitational competitor, one (1) place point will be
awardedtowardshis/herteamscoreforthe4-wayinvitationalevent.
7.1.3.2.
Ateammustenteratleastthreeracersinordertoscoreasateam.
7.1.3.3. Nordic teams not in the 4-Way Invitational Event shall be displaced
fromthisscoring.
7.1.4. TieBreaking
7.1.4.1. Tiebreakingistobeusedonlyforthefirstthreeteamsplacing.Ifatie
exists for places beyond third, they will remain as ties. Tie breaking is
accomplished by adding up the percent back of each of the four events,
wherepercentagebackisdeterminedbythefollowingformula:
(Sum of the team’s times)-(Sum of the winning team’s times) / (Sum of
winningteam’stimes)
105
2016-2017CompetitionandRulesManual–ApprovedJanuary12,2017
2016.v.1.4
Wherethelowesttotalofthefourpercentagebackswins.
7.2. NordicScoring
7.2.1. If an institution enters more than five (5) racers, the team captain/coach
mustdesignatethefive(5)competitorstobeconsidered“counters”forscoring
procedures.
7.2.2. Team scoring for the Nordic championship is accomplished by adding
togethertheteamscoresoftheindividualclassical,freestyleandsprintevents,
andtheNordicrelayrace.NordicscoringisbythePointbyPlacesystem.(See
Section7.1.2).Nordicrelayteamscoringisasfollows:
6points-FirstPlaceTeam
15points-SecondPlaceTeam
24points-ThirdPlaceTeam
The points are to be increased by nine (9) for each team on through the
remainingrelayresults.
7.2.3. TodeterminetheIndividualNordicCombinedAward,totalplacepointswill
be utilized for the individual classical, freestyle and sprint events. (Individual
WorldCupPointswillbeusedtobreakatie.Ifatiestillexists,itremainsatie).
7.2.4. TieBreaking
7.2.4.1. Team: The sum of each team’s “Place Points” for the (3) best
individualteammembersisusedtodetermineteamrankingforeachrace.
If the team points result in a tie then the by the lowest place of the 4th
place athlete from each of the teams will determine the rank. If a team
doesnothavefourathletesfinishtheracethenthelowesttotaltimeofthe
threescoringathleteswillbeused.
7.3. AlpineScoring
7.3.1. Thealpineracesshallbescoredusingaggregations.
7.3.2. Teampositionsinalpineracesshallbedeterminedbythesumofthetimesof
thefastestthreeracersfromeachteam.
7.3.3. Shouldateamnotfinishthreeracers,110%oftheslowesttimeusedbyany
teaminthecompetitionshallbethedummyalpinescore.
7.3.4. In each alpine race, one point shall be awarded to the winning team, two
pointsforsecond,etc.,thatispointsareawardedaccordingtonumericfinish
(finishpoints).
7.3.5. The alpine championship is determined by adding team finish points in
slalomtothatofgiantslalomwiththelowtotalbeingthewinner.
7.3.6. TodeterminetheIndividualAlpineCombinedAward,totalUSSAracepoints
willbeutilizedfortheslalomandgiantslalomevents,withthelowtotalbeing
the winner. Ties shall be broken by using the current world cup system of
106
2016-2017CompetitionandRulesManual–ApprovedJanuary12,2017
2016.v.1.4
scoringthetop30.ShouldatieexistinthesumofWCpoints,thesumoffinish
placesshallbetakentobreakthetie.
7.3.6.1. Racers that do not start, are disqualified or DNF will receive place
pointsequaltototalfinishers+1.Shouldatiestillexist,thesumofrace
points for the competitors shall be taken as a tiebreaker. In case of two
goldmedalistswithonlyonesinglefinish,bothwillbeinvited.
7.3.7. TieBreaker:Thesumofeachteam’s“PlacePoints”forthe(3)bestindividual
teammembersareusedtobreakateamtie.Scoringof“PlacePoints”willbeas
follows:1stPlace-onepoint,2ndPlace-twopoints,3rdPlace-threepoints,
etc. When at least three team members fail to finish, the sum of each team’s
“PlacePoints”,istousethetotalfinishnumberplusoneasthepointsscoredby
eachnon-finishingteammember.Individualsand4-wayinvitationalteamsdo
notdisplacepointsfortheAlpineonlyevent.These“PlacePoints”shallbeused
tobreakties.Shouldatieoccurusingfinishpoints,fractionalpoints(0.5)shall
beaddedtotheteamwiththegreatestnumberof“PlacePoints”.ForRegional
andNationalevents,ifatieisnotbrokenwithplacepoints,thenextstepisto
use USSA calculation and race points (the “ f “ factor), not the penalty points.
Conferences may still use cumulative times for this decision at conference
events.
7.4. SnowboardScoring
7.4.1. If an institution enters more than five (5) riders into any Snowboard
competition, the team captain/coach must designate the five (5) riders to be
scoredforteamscoringproceduresduringtheseedingprocess.
7.4.2. AlpineEvents(SL,GS,P-SL,P-GS)
7.4.2.1. Thealpineracesshallbescoredusingaggregationsorplacebypoints
ifqualifyingrounddualcompetitions.
7.4.2.2. Teampositionsinalpineracesshallbedeterminedbythesumofthe
timesofthefastestthreeracersfromeachteam.
7.4.2.3. Shouldateamnotfinishthreeracers110%oftheslowesttimeused
by any team in the competition shall be the dummy alpine score. (If not
usingaggregatetimes,seeSection7.4.2.2)
7.4.3. FreestyleEvents(SnowboardCross,Halfpipe,RailJamandSlopestyle)
7.4.3.1. Teampositionsinsnowboardcrossshallbedeterminedbythesumof
theplacesofthebestthreecompetitorsfromeachteam.
7.4.3.2. When at least three team members fail to finish, the scoring
procedureistousethetotalfinishnumberplusoneasthepointsscored
byeachnon-finishingteammember.
7.4.3.3. Forteamscoring:breakingtiesfor9thondown,runmoreconsolation
roundstodetermineaplaceforeveryone.
7.4.4. TeamScoring
107
2016-2017CompetitionandRulesManual–ApprovedJanuary12,2017
2016.v.1.4
7.4.4.1. Ineachteamevent,yourtop3competitorscombineforateamtime
or team score. The team with the lowest time (alpine events) or score
(freestyle)isthewinner
7.4.4.2. FortheTeamCombined,youaddtheteamsplaceineachoftheevents
for a team score. The team with the lowest score wins. (Individual place
pointsbreakthetie.Ifthescoreisstillatie,itremainsatie.)
7.4.4.3. If 2 or more Alpine Events are offered as indicated in Section 7.4.2
above,combinedawardsshallbeissuedasfollows:
•
Snowboard Alpine Awards to teams based on combined scores of
theseofferedevents:SL,GS,P-SL,P-GS,Cross.
•
Snowboard Freestyle Awards to teams based on combined scores
oftheseofferedevents:Slopestyle,RailJam,Halfpipe,Cross
7.4.5. IndividualScoring
7.4.5.1. The Individual Combined is scored by using the sum of Place Points
forallevents.(IndividualWorldCupPointswillbeusedtobreakatie.Ifa
tiestillexists,itremainsatie.)
7.4.5.2. If 2 or more Alpine Events are offered as indicated in Section 7.4.2
above,combinedawardsshallbeissuedasfollows:
•
Snowboard Alpine Awards to individuals based on combined
scoresoftheseofferedevents:SL,GS,P-SL,P-GS,Cross.
•
Snowboard Freestyle Awards to individuals based on combined
scoresoftheseofferedevents:Slopestyle,RailJam,Halfpipe,Cross.
7.5. FreeskiScoring
7.5.1. Ifaninstitutionentersmorethanfive(5)ridersintoanyFreeskicompetition,
theteamcaptain/coachmustdesignatethefive(5)riderstobescoredforteam
scoringproceduresduringtheseedingprocess.
7.5.2. SkierCross,Half-pipe,RailJamandSlopestyle
7.5.2.1. TeampositionsinSkierCrossshallbedeterminedbythesumofthe
placesofthebestthreecompetitorsfromeachteam.
7.5.2.2. When at least three team members fail to finish, the scoring
procedureistousethetotalfinishnumberplusoneasthepointsscored
byeachnon-finishingteammember.
7.5.2.3. Forteamscoring:breakingtiesfor9thondown,runmoreconsolation
roundstodetermineaplaceforeveryone.
7.5.3. TeamScoring
7.5.3.1. Ineachteamevent,yourtop3competitorscombineforateamscore.
Theteamwiththesumofthelowestplacepointscoresisthewinner.
108
2016-2017CompetitionandRulesManual–ApprovedJanuary12,2017
2016.v.1.4
7.5.3.2. FortheCombined,youaddtheteam’splaceineachoftheeventsfora
teamscore.Theteamwiththelowestscorewins.(Individualplacepoints
breakthetie.Ifthescoreisstillatie,itremainsatie.)
7.5.3.3. Team Combined Participation Requirement. At least one individual
athlete from a team must start in exactly or at least 50% of the offered
eventsofacompetitioninorderfortheteamtobeeligiblefortheoverall
combined results. If the team does not meet the above criteria, the team
willbeexcludedfromtheoverallcombinedresults.Theteamawardsof
each event where a team fields at least one athlete will not be affected.
Place points for each event of the team combined will be adjusted to
includeonlytheteamswhomeettheabovecriteria.
(O.I:Iftheindividualcompetitionhad5athletes,placing1,2,3,4,and5,and
athlete 1 and 4 were not eligible to be included the individual combined,
thenathlete2wouldmoveintothe1stplaceposition,athlete3wouldmove
into the 2nd place position, and athlete 5 would move into the 3rd place
position.Thissameadjustmentprocesswilltakeplaceintheteamcombined
calculation.)
7.5.3.4. NoteamshallbeallowedtoenteranathleteintotheSkierCrossunless
the team is properly registered as a Freeski team with the USCSA. Since
Crossisaneliminationevent,noguestsareallowedtocompete.
7.5.4. IndividualScoring
7.5.4.1. TheIndividualCombinedisscoredbyusingPlacePointsforallthree
events.(IndividualWorldCupPointswillbeusedtobreakatie.Ifatiestill
exists,itremainsatie.)
7.5.4.2. Anathletemuststartinexactlyoratleast50%oftheofferedeventsof
acompetitioninordertobeeligiblefortheoverallcombinedresults.Ifan
athletedoesnotmeettheabovecriteria,theathletewillbeexcludedfrom
the overall combined results. The individual results and team awards of
that event will not be affected. Place points for each event of the
individual combined will be adjusted to include only the athletes who
meettheabovecriteria.
7.5.4.3. NoathleteshallbeallowedtoentertheSkierCrosscompetitionunless
thatathleteisproperlyregisteredasaFreeskiathletewiththeUSCSAand
pays the appropriate USCSA and USCSA National Championships fees.
SinceCrossisaneliminationevent,noguestsareallowedtocompete.
7.6. USCSAAll-AmericanSkiTeam
7.6.1. FirstTeam
7.6.1.1. The first five finishers in the slalom, giant slalom, individual alpine
combined,snowboardgiantslalom,snowboardboarder-cross,snowboard
freeskiing and individual snowboard combined, Nordic classical, Nordic
109
2016-2017CompetitionandRulesManual–ApprovedJanuary12,2017
2016.v.1.4
freestyle, nordic sprint, individual Nordic combined and the winning
Nordicrelayteams(menandwomen),shallconstitutetheFirstTeam.
7.6.2. SecondTeam
7.6.2.1. The second group of ten finishers (6th-15th) in the slalom, giant
slalom, individual alpine combined, snowboard giant slalom, snowboard
boarder-cross,snowboardfreestyleandindividualsnowboardcombined,
Nordic classical, Nordic freestyle, Nordic sprint, individual Nordic
combined and the 2nd place relay teams (men and women) shall
constitutetheSecondTeam.
7.6.3. The number of All-Americans per discipline shall be based on field size.
Five All-Americans will be named for each whole multiple of five teams
involvedintheevent,nottobelessthantenindividuals.
7.7. USCSAScholasticAthleteRecognition
7.7.1. USCSAScholarAll-AmericanSkiTeam
7.7.1.1. TheScholarAll-AmericanswillbeselectedfromallMenandWomen
participating at the United States Collegiate Skiing and Snowboard
Championships.
7.7.1.1.1.
AthleteswithaGPAbetween3.80to4.00willbegrantedFirst
TeamAll-AmericanHonors.
7.7.1.1.2.
AthleteswithaGPAbetween3.50to3.79willbenamedtothe
SecondTeamAll-American.
7.7.1.1.3.
Athletes with a GPA between 3.30 to 3.49 will receive
HonorableMentionAll-American.
7.8. USCSAHolgerPetersenVolunteerAward
7.8.1.1. TheHolgerPetersenVolunteerAwardwillbepresentedattheUnited
StatesCollegiateSkiingandSnowboardChampionshipsandannouncedat
theRegionalevents&attheseasonendingconferenceevents.
7.8.1.1.1.
Criteria
7.8.1.1.1.1.
RecipientmusthaveservedontheBODforaminimum
ofsixyears.
7.8.1.1.1.2.
Made significant contribution to the Board, with a
positiveeffect.
7.8.1.1.1.3.
Pastrecipientsarenoteligiblefortheaward.
7.8.1.1.1.4.
Only the Nominations & Awards Committee makes
Nominations.
7.8.1.1.1.5.
Must receive a minimum of 50% of the BOD votes to
receivetheaward.
7.8.1.1.2.
110
PastRecipientsoftheHolgerPetersenVolunteerAward.
2016-2017CompetitionandRulesManual–ApprovedJanuary12,2017
2016.v.1.4
2016–PaulRozsypal
2013–RobinDzubay
2012–AndrewRangen
O.I. This is currently a partial list until all previous recipients can be
determinedbytheHistorianCommittee
7.9. ArmedServicesAward
7.9.1. A Service Academy is defined as a federal academy for the undergraduate
educationandtrainingforcommissionedofficersfortheUnitedStatesArmed
Services.TherearecurrentlyfiverecognizedServiceAcademieseligibletowin
theUSCSAArmedServicesAward:
•
TheUnitedStatesMilitaryAcademyinWestPoint,NewYork
•
TheUnitedStatesNavalAcademyinAnnapolis,Maryland
•
TheUnitedStatesCoastGuardAcademyinNewLondon,Connecticut
•
TheUnitedStatesMerchantMarineAcademyinKingsPoint,NewYork
•
TheUnitedStatesAirForceAcademyinColoradoSprings,Colorado
7.9.2. The Armed Services Award is awarded to the top performing service
academy,combiningbothmenandwomen,ateachyear’sUSCSACollegiateSki
and Snowboard National Championships. Team scoring for the “Armed
ServicesAward”isaccomplishedbyusingtheteamfinishpointscoringsystem
for each event that at least one Service Academy participated in. A team’s
placement is determined by combining each service academy’s team place
pointsfromallevents,afterexcludingnonserviceacademyteams.Ifaservice
academydidnotparticipateinanevent,theyareassessedapenaltyofthetotal
numberofserviceacademiesinanevent,plusone,astheirplacementforthe
event. The team with the lowest combined finish points score for all events
which a service academy participated in shall be the winner of the Armed
ServicesAward.
7.9.3. TieBreaking
7.9.3.1. Tiebreakingistobeusedonlyforthefirstteamplacing.Ifatieexists
for places beyond first, they will remain as ties. The first tie-breaker is
calculatedbyaddingtheteam’sindividualplacepoints,afterremovingall
nonserviceacademyteams.Ateamisdefinedasthegroupofcompetitors
thatcounttowardtheteamresultinanyevent,asdefinedbytherulesof
thatevent.Ifaserviceacademydoesnotparticipateinanevent,ordoes
111
2016-2017CompetitionandRulesManual–ApprovedJanuary12,2017
2016.v.1.4
nothaveatleasttheminimumathletesneededtoscoretofinishtheevent,
they are assigned a penalty of the number of athletes plus one for each
non-finishingathlete,uptotheminimumnumberneededtoscoreforan
event,astheirscore.
7.9.3.2. Shouldatieremainafterusingindividualplacepoints,tiebreakingis
accomplished by calculating the average of the percentage back of all
events,wherethepercentagebackoftimedeventsiscalculatedby:
(Sum of the team’s times)-(Sum of the winning team’s times) / (Sum of
winningteam’stimes)
andthepercentagebackofnon-timedeventsiscalculatedby
(Sumoftheteam’splacepoints)-(Sumofthewinningteam’splacepoints)
/(Sumofwinningteam’spoints)
112
Wherethelowestaverageofthepercentagebackswins.
2016-2017CompetitionandRulesManual–ApprovedJanuary12,2017
2016.v.1.4
8.0 Section8–NationalChampionshipsQualifications
8.1. RegionalQualificationProcessTowardsAttendanceAtNationals
8.1.1. Team and individual attendance to the 'United States Collegiate Skiing and
Snowboarding Championships'(TM) can only be achieved through
participation in a conference and regional qualifying process. All teams must
have completed the required USCSA team registration and USCSA eligible
forms.
8.1.2. The USCSA mandates that each designated region hold an end-of-season
regional championship with the qualifying teams advancing to the national
championships. The regionals should be completed ten days prior to the
nationalchampionships.Allparticipatingmembersofaregionalchampionship
team attending the national championship must have proceeded through the
qualifyingprocessasmembersofthatteam.
8.1.2.1. Regional Championship event Coordinators are responsible for
submitting qualified teams to the USCSA National Office on the day
immediatelyfollowingthecompletionoftheircompetition.
8.1.3. Regionalsshallbeashowcaseeventandregionaleventcoordinatorsshould
makeaspecialefforttomimicthenationalchampionshipevent.
8.1.3.1. Required Competitive events at Regional Championships should
complement the events that occur at the National Championships. The
events, Techniques, dates and location of the Regionals Championships
shall seek the input and recommendation by the Vice President of each
discipline.
8.1.3.2. There shall be an elimination process (alpine) at the
conference/divisionalleveltoqualifyforRegionalChampionships.
8.1.3.3. If there are to be peripheral/additional features or activities at
regional championships, (i.e. Banquet, t-shirts, tours, etc.) all involved
conferencesmustagreetothecostthisinadvanceoffinalplanning.
8.1.3.4. The host conference is responsible for presenting the method for
recommending the appointment of officials, how timing and calculations
willbedone,venueselection,dateselectionandeventcost(brokendown
toindicateracefees,hillfees,andextrasnotcriticaltotheproductionof
the athletic event) 60 days prior to the event to the visiting conferences
for concurrence. All conferences must agree in advance to those actions
taken.
8.1.3.5. Each region will determine how hosting responsibility is to be
assigned.(i.e.noteveryregionwillnecessarilywanttorotateamongallof
theconferencestobetheregionalhost.)
113
2016-2017CompetitionandRulesManual–ApprovedJanuary12,2017
2016.v.1.4
8.1.3.6. ThehostingconferenceshallsubmitaRegional’sreporttotheboard
eachyear.
8.1.3.7. If a Guest Team (See Team and Individual Eligibility Rules Section
2.1.2) is approved to participate at the Western Regional Championship,
thatteamisrequiredtopayaparticipationfeeequalto3/5oftheUSCSA
membershipdues,totheregionalconferencehostingthatyear.
8.1.4. To compete at Regionals and Nationals, ALL Competitors AND their
institutionsmustbemembersingoodstandingofUSCSA.
8.1.5. IntheeventthatarunofaraceiscancelledataRegionaleventorthatthe
entireraceeventthatdayiscancelled,resultsfromtheexistingeventswillbe
consideredintheirentiretyforqualifyingtonationals.TheJurymustmakethis
decision.
8.2. RegionalTeamAllocationToTheAnnualUscsaNationalChampionship
8.2.1. Attendance to the annual USCSA national championships is based on the
following:
8.2.1.1. NumberofAlpineCompetitors.AtaNationalChampionship:Inorder
tomaintainraceandcoursequality,thereexistsagoalofhavingnomore
than 100 qualified team competitors and 40 4-way Invitational
competitors in both Men's and Women's disciplines at a national
championship race. The regional team allocation shall total 20 qualified
teams and 8 4-way Invitational teams of five (5) persons each, with the
balance of the field being allocated to six (6) outstanding individual
competitorspersex,one(1)fromeachofthesixindicatedUSCSAregional
championship areas whose team failed to qualify. Thus: 28 teams x 5
persons per team = 140 racers plus outstanding individual entries, male
andfemalefromeachregion.Thetotalnumberofentriescannotexceed
150perevent.
8.2.1.2. Number of Nordic Competitors. At a National Championship: Section
II.C below dictates the number of teams allowed to compete at the
nationalchampionships.Ateamcompetingatthenationalchampionships
mayregisteranynumberofathletesthathavequalifiedforthenationals
viatheregularprocedures.Aninstitutionmayenteruptofive(5)athletes
perraceandtheymaycompetefortheirschoolsinindividualeventsand
onlythree(3)maycompetefortheirschoolintherelayevent.Theymay
competefortheirschoolintheindividualeventsandonlythree(3)may
compete as the relay team for the school in the relay event. These limits
applyseparatelyforthemen'sandwomen'ssquadsofaschool'steam.
8.2.1.3. All USCSA teams and individuals meeting qualification requirements
for the National Championship will be invited to attend. Nordic teams,
Nordic individuals, Snowboard teams and Snowboard Individuals must
compete in a regional event to be eligible to qualifying for the National
114
2016-2017CompetitionandRulesManual–ApprovedJanuary12,2017
2016.v.1.4
Championships. If they cannot, they must petition the National
ChampionshipCommittee.
8.2.1.4.
Additionalracersmaybeinvitedtoraceasnon-scoringindividuals.
O.I.:Non-scoringmeanstheindividualdoesnotreceiveindividualhonorsor
awards,nordotheydisplacescoringracers.
8.2.1.5. Number of 4-way Invitational Team Competitors at a National
Championship.
8.2.1.5.1.
4-wayinvitationalteamsattendingthenationalchampionships
shall comprise of men’s and women’s teams who have both alpine
and Nordic teams and who have not previously qualified through
normalregionalquotaselection.
8.2.1.5.2.
Invitational team selection shall be awarded to the two (2)
highestplacing4-wayteamsattheendofeachregionaltournament
basedontheNational4-wayscoringrules.
8.2.1.5.3.
Unfilled invitational team quota slots from each region shall
remainunfilledatthenationalchampionships.
8.2.1.5.4.
Invitational team scoring shall only apply to the 4-way
combinedeventchampionship.Theymaynotbeincludedinthe
individual-event-teamstanding.
8.2.1.5.5.
Alpine teams that qualify in this manner (4-Way Event only)
areseededinthefirstrunafterthefifthseed(behindalloftheteams
that have qualified as alpine teams) thus starting 101 at the latest.
(2ndrunwillbeBIBBO.)
8.2.1.5.6.
The4-WayInvitationalEventwillcontinuethroughthe20122013 season. This will be reviewed at the 2014 Board of Directors
meeting.(Reviewedeverytwoyears.)
8.2.2. RegionalTeamAllocationstotheUSCSANationalChampionships
8.2.2.1. DesignatedChampionshipRegionsandRegionalTeamAllocationsfor
Nordicwillbeasfollows
NordicRegion
#M/W
1
WesternRegion
3/3
Northwest, Rocky and Grand Teton
Conferences
2
FarWestRegion
2/2
NorthernCaliforniaConference
SouthwestConference
3
115
MidwestRegion
2/2
2016-2017CompetitionandRulesManual–ApprovedJanuary12,2017
2016.v.1.4
MidwestConference
4
EasternRegion
6/6
EasternConference
5
Mid-AtlanticRegion
1/1
Allegheny,AtlanticHighlands,Southeastern
Conferences
6
NewYorkRegion
NA
MideastConference
8.2.2.2. 4-Way berths will be allocated based on application to the National
Championships Committee and will allocate no more than 8 qualifying
teamsthatdidnotqualifyoutrightineachdiscipline.
8.2.2.3. Forunusedberthsupto2/2teamscanbereservedfordiscretionary
assignmentfromanyregion.RequestsshouldbesubmittedtotheUSCSA
NordicVicePresidentandtheUSCSAPresident.
8.2.3. USCSA National Championship Alpine Quota Determination. The Alpine
Quotas are comprised of two components. The first being membership based
and the second performance based. The number of female and male quota
spotsassignedtoaregionisthesameforeachsex.
8.2.3.1. Membership Berths. The membership component is determined as
follows.EachUSCSARegionisawardedonequotaspotforeach22alpine
member teams (a men’s and women’s teams each count as one) or part
thereof,asdeterminedbymembershipapplicationsrecordedascomplete
by the USCSA National office on January 1st of the given competition
season.IndividualsregisteredwiththeNationalofficearenotincludedthe
calculation. There is no cap on the total number of membership quota
spots that can be awarded. The target is 17 quota spots based on
memberships.Iftheformuladoesnotgenerate17quotaspots,theUSCSA
may revise the number of member teams required to earn a quota spot
downbyoneuntil,aminimumof17isachieved.
Example:RegionAhas22men'steamsand21women'steamstotaling43.
Teams 1 through 22 earn the first membership quota spot. Teams 23
through43earnthesecondmembershipquotaspot.RegionAisawarded2
membershipquotaspots.
8.2.3.2.
116
Noregioncanlosemorethanonequotaspotperyear.
2016-2017CompetitionandRulesManual–ApprovedJanuary12,2017
2016.v.1.4
8.2.3.2.1.
Ifthetotalnumberofspotsawardednationwideisonly15,the
process is repeated awarding one quota spot for every 21 teams or
partthereof.
Example: Region A has 43 teams. Teams 1 through 21 earn the first
membership quota spot. Teams 22 through 42 earn the second
membershipquotaspot.Team43earnsthethirdquotaspot.RegionA
isawarded3quotaspots.
8.2.3.3. Performance Berths. Three quota spots are awarded based on past
performance at the US Collegiate National ChampionshipsTM. The
performance based quota spots are calculated in the following iterative
manner. The immediate past three years are used to calculate
performance quota spots. A region’s performance is determined by
summingtheplacepointsinthecombinedresultsforthebestperforming
men’s and women’s team, from each region over the three year period.
The regions are then ranked based on the total place points. The region
with the lowest total place points receives the first performance quota
spot. The process is then repeated using best performing men’s and
women’steamfromeachregionexceptfortheregionhavingreceivedthe
firstperformanceberth.Thatregionshallusethesecondbestperforming
men’s and women’s team over the three year period. The second
performance quota spot will be awarded to the region with the lowest
total place points. The third quotda spot shall be calculated in a similar
manner eliminating the region receiving the second place performance
berth.Tiesareonlybrokenforthethirdperformancequotaspot.Thefirst
tie-breaker is the tied region closest to receiving an additional
membership berth. The second tie-breaker is the region with the best
finishusedintheperformanceberthcalculation.Aregioncanearnmore
thanoneofthesequotaspots.
8.2.3.3.1.
Performance Berth example calculation is provided below.
Place point totals represent best male and best female team
performanceforthegivenyearaddedtogether.
Example: If Region A’s best Women’s team placed second and best
men’steamplacedthirdin2008,theywouldreceive2+3foratotalof
5placepointsfor2007.Ifin2008theyreceivedatotalof6placepoints
and in 2009 10 place points their First Place total would be 21. If 21
points is low enough to earn a performance berth, the process of
summingplacepointsisrepeatedfortheRegionA’ssecondplaceteams
forthenextround.
117
2016-2017CompetitionandRulesManual–ApprovedJanuary12,2017
2016.v.1.4
TeamsbyRegion
First Place SecondPlaceTeam Third
Team
Team
2013 Total
1
Western
4
12
21
2
FarWest
2
32
#N/A
3
Midwest
10
22
28
4
Eastern
7
10
12
5
Mid-Atlantic
24
32
35
6
Mideast
15
94
#N/A
Total
Place
Total
TeamsbyRegion
First Place SecondPlaceTeam Third
Team
Team
2012 Total
1
Western
3
12
29
2
FarWest
4
34
39
3
Midwest
8
24
32
4
Eastern
9
9
11
5
Mid-Atlantic
29
29
#N/A
6
Mideast
23
28
30
Total
Place
Total
TeamsbyRegion
First Place SecondPlaceTeam Third
Team
Team
2011 Total
1
Western
3
10
16
2
FarWest
3
10
34
3
Midwest
18
25
34
4
Eastern
6
14
18
5
Mid-Atlantic
30
37
39
6
Mideast
16
30
#N/A
Total
Place
Total
118
2016-2017CompetitionandRulesManual–ApprovedJanuary12,2017
2016.v.1.4
8.2.3.3.2.
Population & Performance Berths for 2016/2017 will be
awarded as per below. The total number of teams was 223 for
2016/2017.
Region
#ofTeams
Population
Berth
PerformanceBerth TotalBerths
West
29
2
1
3
FarWest
28
2
1
3
Midwest
36
3
3
Eastern
54
4
1
5
Mid-Atlantic
48
4
4
NewYork
(formerlyMideast)
28
2
2
8.3. NationalChampionshipEvents
8.3.1. Events
8.3.1.1. Alpine.Men’sandWomen’sGiantSlalom,Men’sandWomen’sSlalom,
Men’sandWomen’sDualSlalom
8.3.1.2. Nordic. Men’s and Women’s 1.5k Individual Sprint, Men’s and
Women’s Freestyle, Men’s and Women’s Classic, Men’s and Women’s
SprintRelay,Men’sandWomen’sSkiJumping.
8.3.1.3. Snowboard. Men and Women’s Parallel GS, Men’s and Women’s
Boarder-X, Men’s and Women’s Slopestyle, Men’s and Women’s Halfpipe,
RailJamorQuarter-Pipe.
8.3.1.4. Freeski. Men’s and Women’s Ski-X, Men’s and Women’s Slopestyle,
Men’sandWomen’sHalfpipe,RailJamorQuarter-Pipe
8.3.1.5. Ski Jumping. Men’s and Women’s Small Hill, Men’s and Women’s 6090MeterHill
8.3.1.6. 4-way Invitational. Men’s and Women’s Giant Slalom, Men’s and
Women’s Slalom, Men’s and Women’s XC Individual Race, Men’s and
Women’sXCRelay
8.3.2. NationalTitles
119
8.3.2.1.
Alpine.Men’sCombinedTeam,Women’sCombinedTeam.
8.3.2.2.
Nordic.Men’sCombinedTeam,Women’sCombinedTeam.
8.3.2.3.
Snowboard.Men’sCombinedTeam,Women’sCombinedTeam.
2016-2017CompetitionandRulesManual–ApprovedJanuary12,2017
2016.v.1.4
8.3.2.3.1.
If Snowboard ScoringRule (See Scoring Rules Section 7.4.4.3)
is triggered, Combined awards will be given per Snowboard
Discipline(AlpineandFreestyle).
8.3.2.4.
Freeski.Men’sCombinedTeam,Women’sCombinedTeam.
8.3.2.5. Ski Jumping. Men’s and Women’s Small Hill, Men’s and Women’s 6090MeterHill.
8.3.3. USCSAAlpineIndividuals.AUSCSAregionmayappointUSCSAindividualsto
attendthenationalchampionships,suchindividualnothavingbeengiventhe
opportunitytoqualifyaspartofateam.Nomorethanone(1)individualper
eventmayqualifyperregion.Ifanindividualisselectedandisalsoamember
of a 4-Way Invitational Event team, no other individual will be selected.
Therefore,he/shewillbeeligibletocompeteatthenationalchampionshipsas
both an individual (seeded with the individual seed), eligible to qualify for
individual results, and as a member of his/her team, eligible to score 4-way
pointsforthe4-WayInvitationalEventtitle.
8.3.3.1. The individual representative from each region to the National
Championships shall be determined by total race points (o.i. see current
year FIS rules for formula) derived from the regional slalom and giant
slalomevents,withthelowtotalbeingthewinner.DNFs,DSQs,andDNSs
willbegiven110%ofthelastfinishersracepoints.Tiesshallbebrokenby
usingthecurrentworldcupsystemofscoringthetop30.Shouldatieexist
inthesumofWCpoints,thesumoffinishplacesshallbetakentobreak
thetie.Racersthatdonotstart,aredisqualifiedorDNFwillreceiveplace
pointsequaltototalfinishers+1.Shouldatiestillexist,thesumofrace
points for the competitors shall be taken as a tiebreaker In case of two
goldmedalistswithonlyonesinglefinish,bothwillbeinvited.
8.3.3.2.
120
WorldCuppointsareawardedasfollows:
FirstPlace
100points
SecondPlace
80points
ThirdPlace
60points
FourthPlace
50points
FifthPlace
45points
SixthPlace
40points
SeventhPlace
36points
EightPlace
32points
NinthPlace
29points
TenthPlace
26points
EleventhPlace
24points
2016-2017CompetitionandRulesManual–ApprovedJanuary12,2017
2016.v.1.4
TwelfthPlace
22points
ThirteenthPlace
20points
FourteenthPlace
18points
FifteenthPlace
16points
Thendecreasingby1pointperplaceto…ThirtiethPlaceat1point.
8.3.3.3. Should a tie exist in the sum of world cup points, the sum of finish
placesshallbetakentobreakthetie.Shouldatiestillexist,thesumofthe
timesofthecompetitorsshallbetakenasafinaltiebreaker.
8.3.4. USCSA Nordic Individuals. Additional individuals may qualify by placing in
the Top 20 places of all individual races in either technique of Classical or
Freestyle in the respective regional events. The maximum number of
individuals to qualify from each region shall be as follows: Western 4M/4W,
Far West 1M/1W, Midwest 2M/2W, East 6M/6W, and Mid-Atlantic 1M/1W. *
For unused berths up to 2/2 individual can be reserved for discretionary
assignment from any region. Requests should be submitted to the USCSA
NordicVicePresidentandtheUSCSAPresident.
8.3.5. ChangesInRegionalAllocation.TheAlpineandNordicCompetition&Rules
Committees shall annually review regional team allocations to the 'United
States Collegiate Skiing Championships' for the purpose of guaranteeing the
strongestregionalteamrepresentation.
8.3.6. Outstanding Alpine Individuals. Each of the six USCSA Regions has the
opportunity to allow up to five skiers per gender entry into their Regional
Championshipsasguestskiers.TheselectionisbasedonthebestUSSApoints
of those requesting entry. Guest skier’s results do not count towards USCSA
team or individual scoring, and do not affect the team scores of represented
colleges. The USCSA, as well, may invite the top guest male and female skier
from the Regional Championships to attend the National Championships,
wherethesamescoringruleswillapply.Tobeeligibleyou:mustbewithinthe
top500onthemostrecentUSSApointslistinSLorGS,havegraduatedfrom
high school, and are not currently listed on a USCSA or NCAA team poster.
RequestsshouldbesubmittedtotheUSCSANationalOffice.
8.4. NationalChampionshipHostingAndSiteSelectionProcess
8.4.1. Thesiteofthe'UnitedStatesCollegiateSkiingChampionships'willberotated
betweentwogeographicallocations(East&West).TheUSCSAwillapproveits’
NationalChampionshipsites,attheannualBoardmeeting,twoyearspriorto
thedateofthatcompetition.TheNationalChampionshipsshouldbeginonthe
first Tuesday in March. The USCSA will make every attempt to have signed
contracts with National Championship sites, announced at the annual Board
Meeting,twoyearspriortothedateofthatcompetition.
8.4.2. NationalChampionshipCommittee.
121
2016-2017CompetitionandRulesManual–ApprovedJanuary12,2017
2016.v.1.4
8.4.2.1. The coordination of a national championship is a complex and
substantialtask.Forthatreason,theUSCSAplacesagreatvalueonbeing
abletoassembleitstopracepeoplefromthroughoutthecountryinorder
toachievethehighestqualityevent.Thefollowingpositionscomprisethe
NationalChampionshipCommittee:
•
Chairperson
•
AlpineCoordinator
•
NordicCoordinator
•
SnowboardCoordinator
•
ExecutiveDirector
8.4.2.2. Any individual, conference or region seeking to have their home
mountain included in the selection process should submit a formal
request to the National Championship Committee Chairperson. The
NationalChampionshipCommitteewilldotheirduediligenceonthesite
based on key criteria to determine overall feasibility. The National
Championship Committee will publish deadlines for these requests and
anyaccompanyingdocumentationbytherequestor.
8.4.2.3.
Championshipsiteselectionisbaseduponthefollowingkeycriteria.
8.4.2.3.1.
Availability of national quality alpine, jumping, snowboard,
freeskiing,andNordiccourses.
8.4.2.3.2.
Proximity of the Nordic, alpine, snowboard, and lodging
facilitiestoeachother.
8.4.2.3.3.
Availability of adequate lodging and banquet facilities able to
seataminimumof500people.
8.4.2.3.4.
AlocalexperiencedNordicraceorganization.
8.4.2.3.5.
Alocalexperiencedalpineandsnowboardraceorganization.
8.4.2.3.6.
Adequatesnowconditionsforallevents,availablethroughthe
secondweekinMarch.
8.4.2.3.7.
Proximity to airports and population centers; news media
availability.
8.4.2.3.8.
National events are scheduled over a —5 day period (not to
include Sunday) with men and women's alpine and the individual
nordicracestobeonseparatedays.
8.4.2.3.9.
Efforts will be made to not use resorts more than 1 time in 4
years.
8.5. NationalChampionshipSchedule
8.5.1. Nordic
122
2016-2017CompetitionandRulesManual–ApprovedJanuary12,2017
2016.v.1.4
8.5.1.1.
8.5.1.2.
EvenYear
•
Day prior other events: Men and Women’s 7.5k Freestyle,
intervalstart
•
Dayone:Men&Women’s1.5kclassicSprint
•
Daytwo:Nordic,restday
•
Daythree:MenandWomen’s15kClassicMassStart
•
Dayfour:MenandWomen’sTeamSprintRelay;FR,FR,FR
OddYear
•
Day prior to other events: Men and Women’s 7.5k Classic,
intervalstart
•
Dayone:Men's&Women’s1.5kfreestyleSprint
•
Daytwo:Nordic,restday
•
Daythree:MenandWomen’s15kFreestyleMassStart
•
Dayfour:MenandWomen’sTeamSprint;CL,CL,CL
8.5.1.3. USCSA Description Team Sprint. A relay-competition with three
athleteswhoalternatelyski3legsofaminimumof1kmandamaximum
1.5kmeachwithallcompetitorsskiingthesameloop)
8.5.1.4. FIS Description Team Sprint. A relay-competition with two athletes
whoalternatelyskibetween3–6legseach.
8.5.2. Alpine
•
Men’sandWomen’sGiantSlalom
•
Men’sandWomen’sSlalom
•
Men’sandWomen’sDualSlalom
8.5.3. Snowboard
8.5.3.1.
Events
•
Men&Women’sGiantSlalom
•
Men&Women’sSnowboardCrossTraining
•
Men&Women’sSnowboardCross
•
Men&Women’sSlopestyle
•
Men&Women’sHalfpipe(SeeSection8.5.3.2)
8.5.3.2. For any year where the National Championship site does not have
facilities to provide a Halfpipe competition, a replacement competition
such as Rail Jam, Quarter Pipe, or other event shall be used, subject to
123
2016-2017CompetitionandRulesManual–ApprovedJanuary12,2017
2016.v.1.4
approval by the National Championships and Snowboard / Freeski
Committees.
8.5.4. Freeski
8.5.4.1.
Events
•
Men&Women’sSkierCrossTraining
•
Men&Women’sSkierCross
•
Men&Women’sSlopestyle
•
Men&Women’sHalfpipe(SeeSection8.5.4.2)
8.5.4.2. For any year where the National Championship site does not have
facilities to provide a Halfpipe competition, a replacement competition
such as Rail Jam, Quarter Pipe, or other event shall be used, subject to
approval by the National Championships and Snowboard / Freeski
Committees.
8.5.5. Jumping
124
•
Men’sandWomen’sSmallHill
•
Men’sandWomen’s60-90MeterHill
2016-2017CompetitionandRulesManual–ApprovedJanuary12,2017
2016.v.1.4
9.0 SECTION9-ARTICLESOFINCORPORATION
9.1. TheseArticlesofIncorporationaresignedandacknowledgedbytheincorporators
forthepurposeofformingacorporationundertheprovisionsofChapter181ofthe
UtahStatutes,withoutstock,andnon-profit.
9.2. ARTICLE I - The name of this corporation is the United States Collegiate Ski &
SnowboardAssociation,Inc.("USCSA”)
9.3. ARTICLEII-Theperiodofexistenceshallbeperpetual.
9.4. ARTICLEIII-Thepurposeorpurposesofthiscorporationareasfollows:
9.4.1. To operate solely for the following purposes which shall remain limited to
those aspects thereof which are exclusively educational, charitable and
scientific.
9.4.2. Tobethegoverningbodyforintercollegiateteamracingcompetitioninthe
disciplinesofAlpine,Nordic,FreeskiandSnowboardforUnitedStatescolleges
and universities; including providing support and participation for U.S.
representationininternationalcollegiateski&snowboardcompetition.
9.4.3. To promote and support amateur national collegiate ski & snowboard
competition, to offer training camps and clinics, to support both team and
individual training for national competition, including the organizing and
administrationofanationalchampionship.
9.4.4. Tofosterparitybothofrepresentationandultimatelycompetitiontocreate
and maintain a level playing field and do all we can to raise the level of
competitionthroughoutallourprogramsfromthebottomup.
9.4.5. To develop and procure equipment necessary to offer collegiate racers the
bestpossibleenvironmentforadvancementinski&snowboardcompetition.
9.4.6. To be a supportive body, on the collegiate level, of the United States Ski &
Snowboarding Association, including the administration of specific programs
beneficialtotheUSSA,inrecognitionofitbeingtheofficiallysanctionedbody
bytheU.S.OlympicCommittee,theU.S.Senate,andtheFISforgoverningU.S.
Ski&Snowboardcompetition.
9.4.7. To promote the ideals of amateurism in competitive events, good
sportsmanship,justiceandfairplay.
9.4.8. To promote intercollegiate ski & snowboard competition for the benefit of
U.S.collegestudents.
9.4.9. To cooperate with other snowsport governing bodies and their respective
committeesinpromotingandsecuringtheforegoingpurposes.
9.5. ARTICLE IV – The location of corporate and principal office is PO Box 180,
Cummington, MA 01026. Shipping address is 320 Stage Road, Cummington, MA
01026.
125
2016-2017CompetitionandRulesManual–ApprovedJanuary12,2017
2016.v.1.4
9.6. ARTICLE V - Thetotalnumberofdirectorsshallbefixedbythecorporation'sByLaws,butshallnotbelessthanthree.
9.7. ARTICLE VI -Thenamesandaddressesofdirectorsconstitutingtheinitialboard
arelistedintheinitialArticlesofIncorporation.
9.8. ARTICLEVII-TheBy-LawsoftheCorporationshallsetforthindetailthemethod
of accepting and discharging members, any denial or restriction of voting rights,
classificationofmembers,includingdistinguishingfeaturesofeachclass.
9.9. ARTICLE VIII - No part of the net earnings of this corporation shall be used for
purposesotherthanaresetforthinArticleIIIabove,andnopartofsuchearnings
shall inure to the benefit of any member, director or officer, except as they may
benefit from either their membership, or participation in its activities. No part of
the activities of the Corporation is carrying on propaganda, or otherwise
attemptingtoinfluencelegislationortoparticipateinorinterveneinanypolitical
campaign on behalf of any candidate for public office. Upon dissolution of this
Corporation,ifever,allremainingassetsandtrademarkshereofshallbedistributed
toorganizationsorganizedandoperatedexclusivelyforcharitable,educationalor
scientific purposes as shall at the time qualify as exempt organizations under
Section501(C)(3)oftheInternalRevenueCodeof1954.
9.10. ARTICLE IX - The name and address of incorporator (or incorporators) are as
follows:USCSA,c/oDruffnerAssociates1912SidewinderDr.,#211ParkCity,Utah
84060.
126
2016-2017CompetitionandRulesManual–ApprovedJanuary12,2017
2016.v.1.4
10.0 SECTION 10 - BY-LAWS OF THE UNITED STATES
COLLEGIATESKI&SNOWBOARDASSOCIATION,INC.
10.1. MISSIONSTATEMENT.
10.1.1.
To be the National governing body of team ski and snowboard
competitionatthecollegiatelevel.
10.1.2.
To promote and increase awareness of and participation in alpine
skiing,nordicskiingfreeskiingandsnowboardingintheUnitedStates.
10.1.3.
To provide competition and development opportunities for studentathletesinateamatmosphereleadingtowardNationalChampionshipsineach
discipline.
10.2. ARTICLEI–OFFICES.
10.2.1.
Principal and Business Offices. The Corporation may have such
principalandotherbusinessoffices,eitherwithinoroutsidetheStateofUtah,
astheBoardofDirectorsmaydesignateorasthebusinessoftheCorporation
mayrequirefromtimetotime.
10.2.2.
Registered Office. The registered office of the Corporation required
by the Utah Business Corporation Law to be maintained in the State of Utah
maybe,butneednotbe,identicalwiththeprincipalofficeintheStateofUtah,
andtheaddressoftheregisteredofficemaybechangedfromtimetotimeby
the Board of Directors. The business office of the registered agent of the
Corporationshallbeidenticaltosuchregisteredoffice.
10.3. ARTICLEII–MEETINGS
10.3.1.
Annual Meeting.TheannualmeetingoftheBoardofDirectorsshall
be held at the date and hour in each year as designated by the Board of
Directors, but at least once a year, for the purpose of electing directors and
officers,andforthetransactionofsuchotherbusinessasmaycomebeforethe
meeting.Theannualmeetingistotakeplaceinthespringorearlysummerof
each year, with notice of the meeting to be given at least thirty (30) days in
advanceofsuchmeeting.
10.3.2.
Special Meetings. Special meetings may be called by standing
committees,bytheBoardofDirectors,orbythePresident,astheoccasionmay
demand; to take care of necessary business as may be required. Thirty (30)
days advance notice has to be given for any special meetings, this to include
time, date and location in addition to all material to be covered by such a
meeting. Special Meetings may be conducted by conference call, e-mail,
physicalpresenceatameetingsiteorbyanyotheragreeduponmethod.The
method for the conduct of a Special Meeting will be determined by the
membersoftheExecutiveBoard.
127
2016-2017CompetitionandRulesManual–ApprovedJanuary12,2017
2016.v.1.4
10.3.3.
Place of Meeting. The Board of Directors may designate any place,
either within or outside the State of Utah, as the place of meeting for any
annualmeetingorforanyspecialmeetingcalledbytheBoardofDirectors.
10.3.4.
Notice of Meeting.Writtennoticestatingtheplace,dayandhourof
the meeting, and, in case of a special meeting, the purpose or purposes for
whichthemeetingiscalled,shallbedeliverednotlessthanthenumberofdays
setforthinSection2.01and2.02.Suchnoticesshallbedeemedtobedelivered
whendepositedintheUnitedStatesmailorasdatedinE-mail,andaddressed
tothemostrecentlyprovidedDirectoraddress.
10.3.5.
Quorum.DuetothespecialstatusofthisCorporation,andtakinginto
consideration the composition of the board of directors, a quorum shall exist
for a duly authorized meeting by virtue of the attendance of those persons
eligibletovoteontheaffairsofthiscorporation.Mattersapprovedatsuchan
authorizedanddulypublicizedmeeting,shallbeconsideredvalidandinforce
untilamendedbyasubsequentlyheldmeeting.
10.3.6.
Conduct of Meetings.ThePresident,orinhisabsencetheExecutive
Vice-President, or in their absence in the order provided under section 4.01,
shall call the meeting to order, and act as Chairperson of the meeting. The
appointedSecretary,butintheabsenceoftheSecretarythepresidingofficer,
mayappointanyotherpersontoactasSecretary,shallrecordallminutesand
actionstakenatthemeeting.
10.3.7.
Unanimous Consent Without Meeting. Any action required or
permittedbytheArticlesofIncorporationorBy-laws,oranyprovisionoflaw
to be taken at a meeting of the Board of Directors, may be taken without a
meetingifaconsentinwritingsettingforththeactionsotaken,shallbesigned
by all members of the Board of Directors entitled to vote with respect to the
subjectmatterthereof.
10.3.8.
Board Member Replacement and Proxy Votes at Meetings. A
Board member, if not attending a meeting, may designate in writing to the
President,andpriortothemeeting,areplacementtorepresenthim/heronthe
Board of Directors at that meeting. An Executive Board member may not
designate a replacement to represent him/her in case of absence at a Board
meeting. If a replacement cannot be found by a Board member to replace
him/herataBoardmeeting,aproxyvoterequestcanbesenttothePresident,
in writing, for that meeting. The written request shall outline the specific
issue(s)towhichtheproxyvoteshallapply,andshallnamethevotingmember
oftheBoardtowhomtheproxyvoteshallbeassigned.Aproxyvoteshallnot
bepermittedforanExecutiveBoardmember.
10.4. ARTICLEIII–BOARDOFDIRECTORS
10.4.1.
GeneralPower,Number,andSelection.Thebusinessandaffairsof
this Corporation shall be managed by its Board of Directors. The Board of
Directors shall set policies, rules, guidelines and the direction of the
corporation. The number of directors of the Corporation shall be such as to
128
2016-2017CompetitionandRulesManual–ApprovedJanuary12,2017
2016.v.1.4
provide the necessary nucleus to represent and direct the activities of this
CorporationfromtheterritoryservicedbythisCorporation.TheDirectorship
size shall be kept to a necessary minimum as decided yearly by the Board of
Directors.Directorsshallbeelectedbyamajorityvotewithintheirrespective
committees to fill available vacancies. Temporary director vacancies may be
filledthroughappointmentbythePresidentoftheCorporation,inconsultation
withappropriatecommitteechairpersons.Ifapersonholdstwoormorevoting
positions,thatpersonshallreceiveonlyonevote.
10.4.2.
Tenure and Qualifications. Each Director shall hold office for a
periodofoneyearoruntilhispriordeath,resignation,orremovalfromoffice
by affirmative vote involving a majority of the directorship, taken at an
appropriately scheduled meeting. A Director may resign at any time by filing
his/herwrittenresignationwithboththePresidentofthisCorporationandthe
elected Secretary. The selection of becoming a Director of this Corporation
shallbebaseduponawillingnesstoservethisorganization,asprescribedby
the Articles of Incorporation, by the By-laws of this Corporation, and by the
guidelines established for directorship qualification within the Competition
Committee.ThePresident,ExecutiveVicePresident,VicePresidentofAlpine,
Vice President of Nordic, Vice of President Snowboard, Vice President
AcademicAffairsandTreasurershallserve3-yearterms.
10.4.3.
Members
10.4.3.1. Conference Coordinators. Each Conference will appoint its
representativetotheBoard,andwillinformtheorganizationofthename
of that individual. Eleven (11) votes come from the conference
coordinators,onepereachconference.Authorizedandvotingconference
representativeshavetobeidentifiedpriortothestartofaBoardmeeting.
10.4.3.2. Executive Board. All are voting members except the Corporate
Secretary, Executive Director, Immediate Past President and President
Emeritus. This is a total of nine (9) votes. Individuals having dual
positions,suchasConferenceCoordinatorandExecutiveBoard,willhave
onlyonevote.
10.4.3.3. StudentAthleteRepresentatives.Thereshallbetwo(2)Alpine,two
(2) Nordic, and two (2) Snowboard/Freeski student athlete
representatives.Allarevotingmembers.
10.4.3.4. USSA Representative. One appointed member (non-voting). This
positionisoptional.
10.4.4.
StudentAthleteRepresentatives.
10.4.4.1. There will be six representatives from among the student-athletes:
TwoAlpine,twoNordic,andtwoSnowboard/Freeski-onefemaleandone
male for each. They will be selected for consideration by the Board
through applications to serve as voting members of the USCSA Board of
Directors.Eachrepresentativewillserveatwo-yeartermandmaybere129
2016-2017CompetitionandRulesManual–ApprovedJanuary12,2017
2016.v.1.4
elected for two terms. May serve in this position within five years
followinggraduation.
Thestudent-athleterepresentative’smissionisto
•
Supportthestudent-athletebyrepresentingtheirintereststotheBoard
ofDirectors.
•
WorkwiththeBoardtoensurethatthegoalsoftheUSCSAarefocused
onthestudent-athletes.
•
Developandimplementprogramstoenhancethestudent-athletes’ski&
snowboardcompetitionexperience.
•
BeactivelyinvolvedwiththeUSCSAstudent-athletes.
•
Generate interest among the student-athletes to become involved with
theUSCSAattheconference,regionaland/ornationallevel(s).
10.4.4.2. Election Procedures. The election of the student-athlete
representatives should be done by selecting one nordic, one snowboard
and one alpine representative each year. Elections shall be one female
nordicathlete,onemalesnowboardathleteandonemalealpineathletein
oddyears,andonemalenordicathlete,onefemalesnowboardathleteand
onefemalealpineathleteinevents.
10.4.4.2.1. Student-athletes wishing to become representatives will
submit an application in writing consisting of a brief resume and
position statement, as well as two written recommendations, one
fromoutsideski&snowboard.Applicationswillbesubmittedtothe
National Office and reviewed by the student-athlete representative
nominationcommittee.
10.4.4.2.2. The committee will consist of the six student-athlete
representatives and the chairperson of the Board’s Nomination
Committee. Representation will be from geographical areas within
the USCSA members to the extent possible from the applications
received.Thecommitteewillreviewanddiscusstheapplicationsand
present the final recommendations to the Board of Directors for
approval. Any representative seeking a second term will not
participateinreviewingtheapplicationsforthatposition.
10.4.4.2.3. The nominations period shall open January 2. Nominations /
Application period shall close 15 business following the close of the
USCSANationalChampionshipsannually.ThenewStudent/Athlete
RepresentativestobeselectedpriortotheUSCSABoardofDirectors
Meeting.SelectionswillbemadebyMay1st.
10.4.4.3. Student Athlete Reimbursement Policy.StudentAthleteRepsmay
receive reimbursement up to $500 for travel to USCSA National
130
2016-2017CompetitionandRulesManual–ApprovedJanuary12,2017
2016.v.1.4
ChampionshipsandBoardofDirectorsMeeting.StudentAthleteRepswill
not be eligible for reimbursement for travel to the USCSA National
Championshipsshouldtheyqualifyandcompeteinagivenyear,asthese
costs are incumbent upon all student athlete competitors in the
organization.Inallinstanceswherereimbursementwillbesoughtbythe
Student Athlete Reps, notice of intention to attend the event and prior
approvalmustbeobtainedfromtheUSCSA.Requestsshouldbesenttothe
NationalOffice30dayspriortotheeventforreviewandresponse.
10.4.5.
USSA Representative of the Board of Directors. The President of
the United States Ski & Snowboard Association has the option of selecting a
member of its Executive Committee to sit on the Board of Directors of the
United States Collegiate Ski & Snowboard Association for the purpose of
assistingintheadvisoryroletotheBoardofDirectorsandsuchrepresentative
is not eligible to be voted or designated as an officer of this Corporation. Nor
shallsaidrepresentativevoteonUSCSAcorporatebusiness.
10.4.6.
Vacancies. Any vacancy occurring in the Board of Directors may be
filled until the next succeeding annual election by the President of this
Corporation, in consultation with appropriate committee chairpersons, if it is
determinedthattheirexpertiseandservicesarerequired.
10.4.7.
Compensation. This Corporation, being non-stock and non-profit,
may, with discretion, authorize reasonable compensation to Directors, not to
exceed personal expenses while they are engaged in approved corporate
activity.
10.4.8.
PresumptionofAssent.ADirectoroftheCorporationwhoispresent
atameetingoftheBoardofDirectors,oracommitteethereofofwhichheisa
member,atwhichactiononanycorporatematteristaken,shallbepresumed
tohaveassentedtotheactiontaken,unlesshisdissent orabstentionshallbe
enteredintheminutesofthemeeting,orunlessheshallfilehiswrittendissent
or abstention to such action with the person acting as the Secretary of the
meeting before the adjournment thereof, or shall forward such dissent or
abstentionbyregisteredmailtothePresidentoftheCorporationimmediately
aftertheadjournmentofthemeeting.Suchrighttodissentorabstentionshall
notapplytoaDirectorwhovotedinfavorofsuchaction.
10.4.9.
Committees.TheBoardofDirectorsbyresolutionsoadoptedbythe
affirmative vote of a majority of the number of Directors present, may
designateoneormorecommittees,eachcommitteetoconsistoftwoormore
Directors elected by the Board of Directors, which to the extent provided in
said resolution as initially adopted, and as thereof supplemented or amended
byfurtherresolutionadoptedbyalikevote,shallhaveandmayexercise,when
theBoardofDirectorsisnotinsession,thepowersoftheBoardofDirectorsin
the management of its assigned affairs of the Corporation, except action in
respect to election of the principal officers or the filling of vacancies on the
BoardofDirectorsorcommitteescreatedpursuanttothissection.Inaddition,
131
2016-2017CompetitionandRulesManual–ApprovedJanuary12,2017
2016.v.1.4
such committees may not allocate or expend funds, not commit future
corporate assets, if such allocations and commitments are not authorized by
the overall Board of Directors and President of this Corporation. Emergency
authorizationscanbegrantedifthereisunanimousagreementtosuchbythe
President, Executive Vice-President, and Treasurer of this Corporation. Each
suchcommitteeshallfixtoitsownrulesgoverningtheconductofitsactivities
andshallmakesuchreportstotheBoardofDirectorsandthePresidentofits
activities,asmayberequested.
10.4.10.
Unanimous Consent Without Meeting. Any action required or
permittedbytheArticlesofIncorporation,orBy-laws,oranyprovisionoflaw
tobetakenbytheBoardofDirectorsorcommitteethereofatameetingorby
resolution,maybetakenwithoutameetingifaconsentinwriting,settingforth
the action so taken, shall be signed by all of the Directors or members of the
committeetheninoffice.
10.4.11.
Duties. All Directors must actively participate on at least one of the
permanentStandingCommitteesasdescribedinArticleV,Section5.01ofthe
By-laws.Failuretodemonstratesuchparticipationtotherespectivecommittee
chairperson and/or Board of Directors would be grounds for removal and
replacement.
10.4.12.
Staff. The Executive Board or the Board Of Directors may appoint
individualstoservetheCorporationincorporatepositionsasrequired.
10.4.13.
ConferenceCoordinators.Therewillbe11conferencecoordinators
representingthe11USCSAConferences,respectively.Eachoftheconferences
willholdelectionsfortheirConferenceCoordinator,accordingtotheirby-laws.
It is strongly recommended the conferences adopt similar by-laws to the
USCSA operating by-laws for officers and terms of office. If a new Conference
Coordinator is elected, the USCSA Board of Directors will be charged with
approving or denying the candidate elected by the conference. Conference
coordinatorsdutiesinclude,butarenotlimitedto:upholdingthetenetsofthe
USCSAMissionStatement,representingtheUSCSAatalocallevel,registration,
and adherence to the standard operating procedures for Conference
Coordinators, fiscal responsibility and reporting, upholding USCSA rules,
upholdingeligibilityrequirements,andtheUSCSAcodeofconduct.Removalof
a USCSA conference coordinator would be subject to violation of the
requirementsputforthfortheConferenceCoordinatorsandbedecidedbyan
ad hoc panel made up of the President, Vice President, Treasurer, and two
ConferenceCoordinatorsappointedbythePresident.
10.5. ARTICLEIV–OFFICERS
10.5.1.
The Executive Board. The Executive Board shall be made up of the
principal officers of the Corporation, consisting of the President, Executive
Vice-President,Vice-PresidentofAlpineCompetitionandRules,Vice-President
of Nordic Competition and Rules, Vice- President of Snowboard Competition
and Rules, Vice President of Academic Affairs, Treasurer, two Executives-at
132
2016-2017CompetitionandRulesManual–ApprovedJanuary12,2017
2016.v.1.4
large, Corporate Secretary (non voting), the President Emeritus (non voting),
the Immediate Past President (non voting), and the Executive Director (nonvoting). The Board may authorize the President to create other positions
deemed necessary on a temporary or experimental basis. Any two or more
offices may be held by the same person except the office of President and
Treasurer, and those of President and any Vice-Presidency. The Executive
Board may also select an Executive Director to manage the day to day
operationsoftheCorporation.
10.5.2.
Election And Term Of Office. Members of the Executive Board are
nominatedandelectedbytheBoardofDirectorsatanannualmeeting,except
for the Corporate Secretary, who is appointed by the President, and the
PresidentEmeritus,ImmediatePastPresidentandExecutiveDirector,whoare
all Ex-officio. The President may not serve more than two 3-year terms in
succession.Allothermembersserve3-yearterms,withnolimitonthenumber
ofconsecutiveterms,exceptthattheImmediatePastPresidentshallserveonly
onethreeyearterm.ThePresident,Exec-VicePresident,VPAlpine,VPNordic,
VP Snowboard, VP Academic Affairs and Treasurer will be elected in
alternatingyears.Eachofficershallholdofficeuntilasuccessorshallhavebeen
dulyelectedoruntilhispriordeath,resignationorremoval.
10.5.2.1. NominationsshallbesoughtbythePresident/Nominations&Awards
Committee 8 weeks prior to the annual BOD Meeting. Nominations shall
be closed 4 weeks later. Following receipt of nominations, the list of
nominationsshallbedistributedtotheexistingdirectorswiththenameof
thenominator(s).Thenomineeswithasinglenominatorshallbeputforth
forsecondingoftheirnominationsbytheexistingdirectors.Secondswill
beacceptedfor1weekfollowingdistribution.Candidateswillbenotified
of nomination and requested to submit a candidate’s statement within 1
week.Allstatementsreceivedwillthenbedistributedtothedirectors.The
electionofofficersshallbethefirstitemofnewbusinessonthemeeting
agenda.Inthecaseofmorethantwonominees(or4fortheExecutive–atLargeposition),aprimaryelectionshallbeheldtoreducethefieldtotwo
candidatespriortothegeneralvote.Electionsshallbeconductedusinga
single paper ballot with all nominees’ names listed for the available
position.Inthecaseofacandidatereceivingthegreatestnumberofvotes
fortwopositions,theywillbeallowedtorelinquishonepositionandthe
process will be repeated, primary & election, including all the original
nomineesstillavailable.Thetermofofficefordirectorswillbeginwiththe
startofnextfiscalyearoftheorganization.
O.I.RotationofVotingforOfficers,startingin:
133
President
2017
ExecutiveVicePresident
2017
2016-2017CompetitionandRulesManual–ApprovedJanuary12,2017
2016.v.1.4
VPAlpine
2018
VPSnowboard
2016
VPNordic
2017
VPAcademicAffairs
2016
Treasurer
2018
ExecutiveatLarge1
2016
ExecutiveatLarge2
2018
10.5.3.
Removal. Any officer or agent may be removed by the Board of
Directors whenever the judgment is that the best interest of the Corporation
willbeservedthereby.
10.5.4.
Vacancies. A vacancy in any principal office because of death,
resignation, or removal, disqualification or otherwise, shall be filled by the
Board of Directors for the un-expired portion of the term. If required, the
President may appoint an acting replacement for any vacant elected position
withtheconsentoftheExecutiveBoard.
10.5.5.
Chairperson of the Board. The Chairperson of the Board is the
President,andhe/sheshallpresideatallmeetingsoftheBoardofDirectorsat
which he/she is president. The President may select another member of the
Board to chair the meeting if he/she so designates. In the absence of the
President, the Board meeting will be chaired by the Executive Vice-President.
Intheabsenceofboth,theBoardofDirectorsmayselectoneoftheDirectorsto
chairthatparticularmeeting.
10.5.6.
President. He/she shall be Ex-officio a member of all Standing
Committeesandshallbechairpersonofsuchcommitteesasisdeterminedby
the Board of Directors. He shall have such other powers and duties as may
fromtimetotimebeprescribedbytheby-lawsorbyresolutionoftheBoardof
Directors. The President shall be responsible for executive and managerial
dutiesinconjunctionwiththeExecutiveDirector,andsubjecttocontrolofthe
BoardofDirectors.Heshallassurethatthefinancialaffairsoftheorganization,
including daily disbursements, collections, audits, and financial reviews, are
properlymaintainedandexecuted.Heshallhavetheauthoritytosign,execute
and acknowledge, on behalf of the Corporation all contracts, leases, reports,
expenditures, and all other documents or instruments necessary or proper to
beexecutedinthecourseoftheCorporation'sregularbusinessaffairs,except
those which require annual Board approval as designated by the Board of
Directors (pertaining to imposed restrictions which limit the assigned rights
and duties of standing committees); and, except as otherwise restricted,
authorize the Executive Vice President or other officers or agents of this
Corporationtosign,executeandacknowledgesuchdocumentsorinstruments
134
2016-2017CompetitionandRulesManual–ApprovedJanuary12,2017
2016.v.1.4
inhisplaceinstead.ThePresidentwillserveontheUSSACollegiateCommittee
andbeinattendanceofthatmeeting,ormaydelegatethisresponsibility.
10.5.7.
Executive Vice-President. The Executive Vice-President assists the
Presidentinthedischargeofsupervisory,managerialandexecutivedutiesand
functions.IntheabsenceofthePresident,orintheeventofhisdeath,inability
orrefusaltoact,theExecutiveVice-Presidentshallperformthedutiesofthe
President. He shall perform such other duties as from time to time may be
assignedtohimbytheBoardofDirectorsorthePresident.
10.5.8.
Vice President(s). The Vice-Presidents will be Committee
Chairpersonswithassignedcommitteeresponsibilities,suchasalpine,nordic,
snowboard, and academic affairs committees. He or she may have such other
duties and exercise such authority as from time to time may be delegated or
assignedtohimorherbythePresidentorbytheBoardofDirectors.
10.5.9.
Corporate Secretary. The Secretary shall keep the minutes of all
Boardmeetingsandconferencecalls.Sendallnoticesasstipulatedinthesebylaws. Be the custodian of the Corporate Records. Have such other duties and
exercisesuchauthorityasfromtimetotimemaybedelegatedorassignedto
himorherbythePresidentorBoardofDirectors.
10.5.10.
Treasurer. The Treasurer shall be responsible for acting as a
guardian over the financial transactions of the organization. Investigate
financial matters and records concerning financial health of the organization,
particularly as directed by the Executive Board. Bring forth issues to the
Executive Board concerning the fiscal operation of the organization. In
conjunction with the President, assure that the financial affairs of the
organization, including daily disbursements, collections, audits, and financial
reviews,areproperlymaintainedandexecuted.
10.5.11.
ExecutiveDirector.TheExecutiveBoardmaydesignateanindividual
to manage and administer the daily affairs of the Association and assign
responsibilitiesasmaybedeemednecessary.TheExecutiveDirectorservesat
thediscretionoftheExecutiveBoard.TheExecutiveDirectorshall,ingeneral,
supervise and control the business affairs of the Corporation, and shall serve
onallcommitteesinanon-votingposition.
10.5.12.
Executive-At-Large.TheExecutives-At-Largewillberepresentatives
elected from the USCSA at-large pool, to the Board of Directors by the full
board. These positions will be two (2) (3) year terms and they will rotate in
election. The Executives-At-Large will be the primary advisors and
administrators for the Student Athlete Representatives. The Executives-AtLargearealsomembersoftheExecutiveBoardofDirectors.
10.6. ARTICLEV–PERMANENTSTANDINGCOMMITTEES
10.6.1.
Number.ThefollowingaretobeconsideredthepermanentStanding
CommitteesoftheCorporation:
10.6.1.1. AlpineCompetitionandRulesCommittee
135
2016-2017CompetitionandRulesManual–ApprovedJanuary12,2017
2016.v.1.4
10.6.1.2. NordicCompetitionandRulesCommittee
10.6.1.3. SnowboardCompetitionandRulesCommittee
10.6.1.4. AcademicAffairsCommittee
10.6.1.5. NationalChampionshipsCommittee
10.6.1.6. BusinessandLegalCommittee
10.6.1.7. NominationsandAwardsCommittee
10.6.1.8. StudentAthleteCommittee
10.6.1.9. TechnologyCommittee
10.6.1.10.NationalOfficeandExecutiveDirectorCommittee
10.6.1.11.HistorianCommittee
10.6.2.
Administration. The permanent Standing Committees shall be
headedbyandcoordinatedthroughrespectivecommitteeVice-Presidents.The
VicePresidentofeachcommitteeshallrepresentthatcommitteetotheBoard
ofDirectors.
10.6.2.1. The Alpine Competition and Rules Committee, the Snowboard
CompetitionandRulesCommitteeandtheNordicCompetitionandRules
Committee shall be chaired by the Vice-Presidents of Alpine, Snowboard
andNordic.ThereDirectors.Thecommitteesshallupdateandsubmitnew
USSA and FIS rules to the Board of Directors each year; run subcommitteemeetingsforrulesandchangestobesubmitted;reportresults
totheBoardofDirectorsforapproval;fieldquestionsduringtheyearas
pertaining to that discipline; and, be an advisor for the national
championships and assist in site recommendations for the national
championships.
10.6.2.2. The Academic Affairs Committee is an authority on the rules of
USCSAandNCAA,andshouldhaveaccesstoNCAAOffices.Thereshallbe
onevotefromthechairpersonofthiscommitteeontheBoardofDirectors.
The committee will include a chairperson and three members. A USCSA
staff person will be an Ex-Officio member to the committee. The
committeeshall:
136
•
Receivecopiesofappealsregardingeligibility.
•
Revieweligibilityregistrationformsofselectinstitutions.
•
Keep the eligibility forms up to date in terms of our rules of
eligibility.
•
Be tasked with the annual updates of the rule book, per the
approved meeting minutes and changes that take place at the
annualBoardMeeting.TheannualeditionoftheUSCSArulesbook
will be released on the first day of September. All rules changes
will be noted in a color other than black for easy identification.
2016-2017CompetitionandRulesManual–ApprovedJanuary12,2017
2016.v.1.4
Each of the VPs of sport discipline will approve their section, by
submittingasignedaffidavitdocumenttotheAACCommittee.
10.6.2.3. The National Championships Committee and chairperson shall be
appointed by the President with approval of the Board of Directors. The
members will include: Chairperson, Alpine Coordinator, Nordic
Coordinator, Snowboard Coordinator, Host School or Conference
Representative, USCSA Executive Director (non- voting), Immediate Past
President (Ex-officio), and two Student Representatives. This committee
shallbeinchargeofoverseeingtheNationalChampionships.
10.6.2.4. The Business and Legal Committee and chairperson shall be
appointed by the President with approval of the Board of Directors. The
committee will include up to five additional members that the President
appoints.TheExecutiveDirectorwillserveasanon-votingmember.
10.6.2.5. The Nominations and Awards Committee chairperson and two
additionalmembersshallbeappointedbythePresident.
10.6.2.6. The Student/Athlete Committee chairperson shall be appointed by
thePresidentwithapprovaloftheBoardofDirectors.Thecommitteewill
includethesixstudent/athleterepresentatives.
10.6.2.7. The Technology Committee is charged with proposing, evaluating,
and recommending implementation of new technologies to advance the
mission,efficiency,andaccuracyofthebusinessoftheUSCSA.Committee
is comprised of 4 members initially appointed by the president. Going
forward, annually, the president will consider nominations from the
committee for new appointments. The committee will select a chair
annually from the committee members following the annual Board of
DirectorsMeeting.
10.6.2.8. National Office and Executive Director Committee membership:
ExecutiveVicePresident,Treasurer,ImmediatePastPresidentsremaining
active on the BOD Committee Duties: Overseeing all aspects National
Officeoperations.Morespecifically,to:
10.6.2.8.1. Make decisions regarding any capital improvements (phone,
computer,computersoftware,etc.)neededatthenationaloffice.
10.6.2.8.2. ToactasaliaisonbetweenourmembershipandourExecutive
Directorwheneverquestionsorconcernsmightarise.
10.6.2.8.3. ToactasaliaisonbetweenboardmembersandourExecutive
Directorwheneverquestionsorconcernsmightarise.
10.6.2.8.4. To act as a liaison between the President and our Executive
Directorwheneverquestionsorconcernsmightarise.
10.6.2.8.5. To conduct annual reviews, including salary reviews, for our
ExecutiveDirector.
137
2016-2017CompetitionandRulesManual–ApprovedJanuary12,2017
2016.v.1.4
10.6.2.9. The Historian Committee is charged with researching, maintaining
and publishing the history of the USCSA. The Committee Chair shall
initiallybeappointedbythePresident.TheChairandthePresidentshall
nameadditionalcommitteemembers.Thecommitteewillbeassignedtwo
orders of business: Create and adopt operating rules and procedures for
committee membership and election of the Committee Chair; and
Document the past National Championships (i.e results, photographs,
article clippings, etc.etc.) throughout the history of USCSA/NCSA
Championships
10.6.3.
CommitteeResponsibilities.Committeechairpersonsshallannually
submit to the Board of Directors for approval, all proposals of operation for
their respective committees, in time for the annual meeting of the Board of
Directors,orasrequired.
10.6.4.
AdditionalSpecialorAdHocCommittees.ThePresident,Executive
BoardandBoardofDirectorscancreatewhateveradditionalcommitteesthat
may be required to meet short term objectives. The number of permanent
standing committees (See Section 10.6.1) shall remain fixed unless these ByLaws are amended accordingly. The President shall be responsible for
appointingthechairpersonandmembersofspecialandadhoccommittees.
10.7. ARTICLEVI–EXECUTIVEBOARD
10.7.1.
Members. The Executive Board of this Corporation consists of the
President,ExecutiveVicePresident,VicepresidentofAlpine,VicePresidentof
Snowboard, Vice President of Nordic, Vice President of Academic Affairs,
Treasurer, Corporate Secretary (non-voting), two Executives At-Large,
President Emeritus, Immediate Past President (non-voting), and Executive
Director(non-voting).TheCorporateSecretaryisappointedbythePresident.
10.7.2.
Function.TheExecutiveBoardshallassistandadvisethePresident,
or,ifrequired,actonhisorherbehalfindevelopingorimplementingprograms
orpoliciesbeneficialtotheCorporation.TheExecutiveBoardisresponsiblefor
the day-to-day execution of programs as approved by the Board of Directors
and in harmony with available resources. The Executive Board shall have the
authority to prescribe the powers, duties, responsibility; to provide
compensation; and, to delegate authority to the chairpersons of the
Corporation.TheExecutiveBoardisempoweredtoactonbehalfoftheBoard
of Directors, with the same power as the Board of Directors on all matters
brought before it between regular meetings of the Board of Directors. If
necessary,theExecutiveBoardmayfillthevacatedpostofthePresidentrather
thanhavingautomaticascendancy.
10.8. ARTICLEVII–MEMBERSHIPANDMEMBERSHIPOBLIGATIONS
10.8.1.
Team Membership. A college ski or snowboard team can gain
membership in the USCSA only through membership in an USCSA sanctioned
andaffiliatedconference,theseconstituting:
138
2016-2017CompetitionandRulesManual–ApprovedJanuary12,2017
2016.v.1.4
10.8.1.1. Region1–West
NorthwestCollegiateSkiConference
RockyMountainCollegiateSkiConference
GrandTetonCollegiateSkiConference
10.8.1.2. Region2–FarWest
NorthernCaliforniaCollegiateSki&SnowboardConference
SouthwestCollegiateSkiConference
10.8.1.3. Region3-Midwest
MidwestCollegiateSkiConference
10.8.1.4. Region4–Eastern
EasternCollegiateSkiConference
10.8.1.5. Region5–Mid-Atlantic
AlleghenyCollegiateSkiConference
SoutheasternCollegiateSkiConference
AtlanticHighlandsCollegiateSkiConference
10.8.1.6. Region6–Mideast
MideastCollegiateSkiConference
10.8.2.
Conference Jurisdiction. No Conference may expand its territory
into another USCSA conference’s assigned area of jurisdiction, without
permission of the conference affected and by affirmative vote at a meeting of
the Alpine, Snowboard and Nordic Competition & Rules Committees. The
USCSA does not recognize any other college racing program for jurisdictional
purposes if such program holds no USCSA affiliation. USCSA member teams
may compete in any affiliated conference on the basis of proximity and
convenience.
10.8.3.
Canadian Team Participation. The USCSA permits Canadian team
membership as part of an USCSA affiliated conference structure based in the
continental United States. Canadian teams must petition the USCSA Board of
Directors for membership through a regional USCSA conference. Membership
will be granted only if a conference votes unanimously in support of such
petition.
10.8.4.
Conference Obligations.AnUSCSAaffiliateconferenceistheofficial
USCSA competition sanctioned structure within the assigned conference
territory, and, therefore, represents the USCSA and has the obligation to
execute for that region all official policy and rule requirements. No affiliate
Conferenceshallhavetheindependentauthoritytoimplementpolicywhichis
not in agreement with USCSA policy unless waived by committee decision to
139
2016-2017CompetitionandRulesManual–ApprovedJanuary12,2017
2016.v.1.4
accommodateauniqueandjustifiableregionalabnormality,andtodosocould
becauseforlossofaffiliationorsanctions.
10.8.5.
Conference Liabilities For USCSA Assets. Each conference is held
responsibleforanyandallequipmentloanedtoitbythisCorporation,thisto
bereturnedingoodworkingorderorthatreplacementfinancialrestitutionis
madeintheeventofanaffiliatestatustermination,orasmaybeorderedbythe
SPECIFICCompetition&RulesCommittees.
10.8.6.
USCSA rights to Conference Assets. Each USCSA conference shall
stipulate in its bylaws that, in the event a conference is dissolved, or in the
eventofbecominginactive,allremainingconferenceassetsshallimmediately
becomepropertyoftheUSCSA.
10.8.7.
Suspension. The USCSA Competition Committee may terminate,
suspend,orfineanyteam,coachoraffiliatewhichbehavesinsuchmanneras
tojeopardizethegoodnameofthisCorporationorthatofanothermemberor
affiliate. Membership in this Corporation should be considered an honorable
distinctionwhichisonlyextendedonaninvitationalbasis.
10.8.8.
SanctionsbyUSCSA.Whendeemednecessary,theUSCSAshallutilize
itspowerstoassurefairtreatment,protectionandfavorableconditionsforall
membersandaffiliatesintheirfinancialandcompetitivedealingswithothers,
andviceversa.Thesepowersinclude,amongothers,suchsanctionsasfinancial
penalties, ineligibility to participate in USCSA functions, boycott, legal action,
etc.
10.8.8.1. Aconfirmedqualifiedteamorindividualwhodoesn’tparticipateina
regional or national championship may have sanctions brought against
thembytheUSCSABoardofDirectors.
10.8.8.2. Institutions/Teams/Individuals allowing membership to lapse or
terminating membership while sanctioned by the organization must
petition the USCSA Executive Board of Directors for reinstatement of
membershipprivileges
10.8.9.
USCSA Financial Aid For Regional Affiliate Programs.TheUSCSA
may make available grants-in-aid to partially cover the expense of operation
for regional affiliate conferences. Until fully used for intended purposes, all
remainingfundsshallremainthepropertyoftheUSCSA.Fulldocumentationof
allfundsutilizedmustbeprovidedtotheUSCSAtomeettherequirementsof
USCSA internal and external audits. In the event of program termination, all
remaining USCSA provided funding shall be returned to the USCSA treasury.
This holds true also for moneys obtained through commercial sponsors, in
which the USCSA negotiated and guaranteed performance on behalf of its
affiliates and committees. Any equipment purchased in part or in whole with
such funds shall become the property of the USCSA and be subject to USCSA
policy.
140
2016-2017CompetitionandRulesManual–ApprovedJanuary12,2017
2016.v.1.4
10.8.10.
Application Of Rules. USCSA competition and eligibility rules shall
uniformly govern all affiliated conference competitive events and the teams
participatinginthem.ItistheresponsibilityoftheCompetitionCommitteeto
fairly develop and administer those rules in joint cooperation between
representative conferences. In the event that a school's athletic department
eligibility policy differs from USCSA policy, USCSA eligibility rules are the
minimum standards for eligibility and competition, (some institutions may
exceed these minimums). USCSA ski & snowboard teams are required to
become familiar with all applicable competition eligibility rules of the
Association.
10.8.11.
Board of Director Representation. Affiliated teams of the USCSA
shallberepresentedontheBoardofDirectorsoftheCorporationthroughtheir
elected conference representative, and the appointed representatives on the
Alpine, Nordic and Snowboard Competition & Rules Committees, and by the
Student-AthleterepresentationontheBoardofDirectors.
10.8.12.
Principles of Sportsmanship and Ethical Conduct. In order to
fulfillthemissionandpurposesoftheAssociationtherigidobservanceofaset
of“principlesofconduct”isrequired.ToenableUSCSAprogramsandeventsto
promotethecharacteranddevelopmentofparticipants,enhancetheintegrity
ofhighereducation,promotefairandsafecompetition,andpromotecivilityin
society, all student-athletes, coaches, and all others associated with USCSA
programs and events shall adhere to such fundamental values as respect,
fairness, civility, honesty and personal responsibility. These values should be
manifestnotonlyinspecificUSCSAprogramsandevents,butalsointhebroad
spectrum of activities involved with and affecting the USCSA programs. To
maintain the desired level of sportsmanship and ethical conduct, it is the
responsibility of each member program to be aware of and adhere to their
institution’s policies regarding sportsmanship and ethical conduct in
intercollegiateathletics,toincludeapplicableNCAAruleswhenapplicableand
thefollowingUSCSAPrinciplesofConduct.
10.8.13.
USCSA Principles of Conduct. Membership in the United States
CollegiateSkiandSnowboardAssociationisaprivilege,notaright.AllUSCSA
members(athletes,coaches,officialsandvolunteers)whenparticipatinginany
USCSA activity must agree to conduct themselves according to USCSA’s core
values and abide by the spirit and dictates of this Principles of Conduct. All
members must agree to conduct themselves in a sportsmanlike manner, and
are responsible for their actions while attending or participating in all USCSA
activities(includingbutnotlimitedtocamps,competitions,projects,meetings
andrelatedbusinessassociatedwiththeaforementioned).
10.8.13.1.Sportsmanlike conduct is defined as, but is not limited to: respect
forfollowingmembers,competitionofficials,volunteers,USCSAandresort
employees,andtheskiingandsnowboardingpublic,respectforfacilities,
privileges and operating procedures, the use of courtesy and good
manners, acting responsibly and maturely, refraining from the use of
141
2016-2017CompetitionandRulesManual–ApprovedJanuary12,2017
2016.v.1.4
profane or abusive language, and abstinence from; illegal use of alcohol,
legaluseofalcoholduringcompetitions&useofillegalorbanneddrugs.
10.8.13.2.WhileparticipatinginanyUSCSAactivity:
10.8.13.2.1. USCSA members shall be subject to the jurisdiction of the
USCSABylaws,andtheUSCSAPrinciplesofConduct.
10.8.13.2.2. USCSAmembersshallconductthemselvesatalltimesandinall
places as befits worthy representatives of the United States of
America, USCSA, their conference, division, or school and in
accordance with the best traditions of national and international
competition.
10.8.13.2.3. USCSA members are responsible for knowledge of and
adherence to competition rules and procedures. Members are also
responsible for knowledge of and adherence to the rules and
procedures of the USCSA Conferences, Divisions and ski resorts or
siteatwhichafunctionhasbeencalendared..
10.8.13.2.4. USCSA members shall maintain high standards of moral and
ethicalconduct,whichincludesself-controlandresponsiblebehavior,
consideration for the physical and emotional well-being of others,
andcourtesyandgoodmanners.
10.8.13.2.5. USCSA members shall abide by USCSA rules and procedures
while traveling to and from and participating in official USCSA
activities.
10.8.13.2.6. USCSAmembersshallabstainfromillegaland/orimmoderate
consumption of alcohol. Absolutely no consumption of alcohol is
permitted during an athletic event (competition, training) or for
individualsundertheageof21.
10.8.13.2.7. Members under 21 years of age shall not participate in
gatherings involving consumption of alcohol unless it is an official
USCSAevent.
10.8.13.2.8. NoUSCSAmembershallknowinglyengageincriminalactivity.
10.8.13.2.9. No USCSA member shall engage in any conduct that could be
perceived as harassment based upon gender, age, race, religion,
disabilityorsexualpreference.
10.8.13.2.10. No USCSA member shall engage in any conduct that could be
perceived as bullying as presented in the USCSA Anti-Bullying
Policyorbystateandfederallaws.
10.8.13.2.11. USCSA members will avoid profane or abusive language and
disruptivebehavior.
10.8.13.2.12. USCSA members agree to abide by anti-doping rules and
proceduresestablishedbyWADA,USADA,and/orFIS.
142
2016-2017CompetitionandRulesManual–ApprovedJanuary12,2017
2016.v.1.4
10.8.13.3.Failure to comply with any of the above provisions may lead to
disciplinary action by the appropriate USCSA Division, Conference or
NationalBodies.Disciplinaryactionmayinclude:
§
Removalfromtheevent(s)
§
Suspensionfromcompetition(s)
§
Elimination of coaching, officiating, volunteering and/or competition
privileges,andotherbenefits.
§
ForfeitureofUSCSAmembership.
10.8.13.4.USCSA is committed to principles of fairness, due process and equal
opportunity.Membersareentitledtobetreatedfairlyandincompliance
with USCSA’s Bylaws, policies and procedures. Members are entitled to
noticeandanopportunityforahearing.Informationontheprocessesfor
grievances,suspensionsandappealsisavailableatwww.uscsa.com.
10.8.13.5.Nothing in this Code shall be deemed to restrict the individual
freedom of a USCSA member in matters not involving activities in which
one could not be perceived as representing USCSA. In choices of
appearance,lifestyle,behaviorandspeechwhilenotrepresentingUSCSA,
Competitors, coaches, officials and volunteers shall have complete
freedom,providedtheirstatementsandactionsdonotadverselyaffectthe
nameandreputationoftheUSCSA.However,inthoseeventswhereoneis
representing or could be perceived as representing USCSA, USCSA
demands that its members understand and agree to behave in a manner
consistent with the best traditions of sportsmanship and USCSA’s core
values.
10.8.14.
ANTI-BULLYING POLICY. USCSA is committed to providing all
membersahealthyandsafeenvironment.USCSAwillensurethatprocedures
exist to allow complaints of bullying to be dealt with and resolved within
USCSA,withoutlimitinganyperson’sentitlementtopursueresolutionoftheir
complaint with the relevant statutory authority. USCSA is committed to the
eliminationofallformsofbullying.
This policy applies to all members of USCSA. It applies at all times when
membersmightbeinteractingtocarryouttheobjectivesoftheUSCSA.There
willbenorecriminationsforanyonewhoingoodfaithallegesbullying.
10.8.14.1.DEFINITIONS.
10.8.14.1.1. Bullying is unwelcome or unreasonable behavior that
demeans,intimidatesorhumiliatespeopleeitherasindividualsoras
a group. Bullying behavior is often persistent and part of a pattern,
butitcanalsooccurasasingleincident.Itisusuallycarriedoutbyan
individual but can also be an aspect of group behavior (see
143
2016-2017CompetitionandRulesManual–ApprovedJanuary12,2017
2016.v.1.4
“mobbing” Section 10.8.14.1.2 below). Some examples of bullying
behaviorare:
•
Verbalcommunication
•
Abusiveandoffensivelanguage
•
Insults
•
Teasing
•
Spreadingrumorandinnuendo
•
Unreasonablecriticism
•
Trivializingofworkandachievements
•
Manipulatingtheworkenvironment
•
Isolatingpeoplefromnormalworkinteraction
•
Excessivedemands
•
SettingimpossibledeadlinesPsychologicalmanipulation
•
Unfairlyblamingformistakes
•
Settingpeopleupforfailure
•
Deliberateexclusion
•
Excessivesupervision
•
Practicaljokes
•
Belittlingordisregardingopinionsorsuggestions
•
Criticizinginpublic
Context is important in understanding bullying, particularly verbal
communication. There is a difference between friendly insults
exchanged by long-time work colleagues and comments that are
meant to be, or are taken as, demeaning. While care should be
exercised, particularly if a person is reporting alleged bullying as a
witness, it is better to be genuinely mistaken than to let actual
bullyinggounreported.
10.8.14.1.2. MobbingandHazing.Mobbingisaparticulartypeofbullying
behavior carried out by a group rather than by an individual.
Mobbing and Hazing are social isolation of a person through
collectiveunjustifiedaccusations,humiliation,generalharassmentor
emotional abuse. Although it is group behavior, specific incidents
144
2016-2017CompetitionandRulesManual–ApprovedJanuary12,2017
2016.v.1.4
such as an insult or a practical joke may be carried out by an
individualaspartofmobbingandhazingbehavior.
10.8.14.2.CONSEQUENCES OF BULLYING. Bullying is unacceptable behavior
because it breaches principles of equality and fairness, and it frequently
represents an abuse of power and authority. It also has potential
consequencesforeveryoneinvolved.
The purpose of this policy is to communicate to all members that the
USCSAwillnotinanyinstancetoleratebullyingbehavior.Membersfound
in violation of this policy will be disciplined, up to and including
revocationofmembershipprivilegesinperpetuity.
Bullying may be intentional or unintentional. However, it must be noted
that where an allegation of bullying is made, the intention of the alleged
bully is irrelevant, and will not be given consideration when meting out
discipline.Asinsexualharassment,itistheeffectofthebehavioruponthe
individualwhichisimportant.
10.8.14.3.RESPONSIBILITIES.
10.8.14.3.1. OfficersandCoordinators.
•
Ensurethatallmembersareawareoftheanti-bullyingpolicy
andprocedures.
•
Ensurethatanyincidentofbullyingisdealtwithregardlessof
whetheracomplaintofbullyinghasbeenreceived.
•
Provide leadership and role-modeling in appropriate
professionalbehavior.
•
Respond promptly, sensitively and confidentially to all
situations where bullying behavior is observed or alleged to
haveoccurred.
10.8.14.3.2. Members.
•
Befamiliarwithandbehaveaccordingtothispolicy.
•
If you are a witness to bullying, report incidents to your
DivisionorConferenceCoordinator,oranOfficeroftheUSCSA
asappropriate
•
Whereappropriate,speaktotheallegedbully(ies)toobjectto
thebehavior.
O.I.:Anathletewhoqualifiesforanon-USCSAeventcalendaredinconflictwith
someoralloftheUSCSACollegiateSkiing&SnowboardingNationalorRegional
145
2016-2017CompetitionandRulesManual–ApprovedJanuary12,2017
2016.v.1.4
Championshipsshallremovethemselvesfromcompetitionsheldforthepurposes
ofqualifyingteamstoUSCSAeventinconflict.
10.9. ARTICLE VIII – AFFILIATION, JURISDICTION, AND COMMERCIAL SPONSOR
OBLIGATIONS
10.9.1.
Affiliations. The Board of Directors of this Corporation may enter
intoagreementsofaffiliationinordertoachievecorporateprogramobjectives
with other non-profit incorporated ski & snowboard industry related
associations.
10.9.2.
Territory.ThisCorporationshallhaveoperationaljurisdictioninthe
continentalUnitedStatesandAlaska.
10.9.3.
NationalSponsorshipAgreements.ThisCorporationmayenterinto
national sponsorship agreements, the implementation of which shall be
accomplished through all respective committees and USCSA Competition
Conferences. National sponsorship programs and their implementation shall
havepriorityoverregionalconsiderations.
10.10. ARTICLEIX–ADVISORYBOARD
10.10.1.
Advisory Board. This Corporation may invite members of the ski &
snowboardindustrycommunityandfromindustriesorprofessionswhichmay
beofaidtotheCorporation,asmembersofaspecialCorporateAdvisoryBoard.
10.10.2.
Chairman.TheChairpersonofthecorporateAdvisoryBoardshallbe
theChairpersonoftheBoardoftheCorporation(USCSAPresident)ormaybe
appointedbythePresident.Inhisabsenceorathisdirection,thisfunctionmay
beperformedbytheExecutiveVicePresident.
10.10.3.
Meetings.Anannualmeetingmaybecalled.Emphasisistobeplaced
onkeepingtheCorporateAdvisoryBoardabreastofalldevelopmentsthrough
regularcorrespondence.
10.10.4.
Tenure. Members of the Corporate Advisory Board shall hold their
positionforaoneyearterm,withtheoptionofrenewalbymutualconsent.
10.10.5.
Powers.TheUSCSAAdvisoryBoardshallactinanadvisorycapacity
totheBoardofDirectors,andmaymakespecificprogramrecommendations.
10.10.6.
Selection. Selection shall be by invitation of the President of this
CorporationandtheExecutiveDirector,withapprovalofboardofdirectors.
10.11. ARTICLEX–COMMERCIALMEMBERSHIP
10.11.1.
Commercial Membership. The USCSA Board of Directors may
annually permit the establishment of a commercial membership. Proceeds
from such membership classification shall be used exclusively to defray the
cost of the annual USCSA “United States Collegiate Skiing and Snowboard
Championships”.
146
2016-2017CompetitionandRulesManual–ApprovedJanuary12,2017
2016.v.1.4
10.11.2.
Benefits To Commercial Members. The Board of Directors of this
Corporation may approve whatever inducements it sees appropriate in order
toattractsuchmembership.
10.12. ARTICLEXI–ALUMNIMEMBERSHIP
10.12.1.
Association of USCSA Alumni. The USCSA shall offer an alumni
membership, with the benefits and dues to be annually determined by the
Board of Directors. The management and promotion of the USCSA alumni
programshallbeimplementedthroughastandingcommitteeandthenational
office.
10.13. ARTICLEXII–AMENDMENTSOFBY-LAWS
10.13.1.
By-Laws Amendments. Any portion of these By-Laws may be
amended by a two-thirds majority vote of the Board of Directors at a duly
authorized Board meeting, with the details of recommendation for change
havingbeenmailedtoallBoardmembersnolessthanthirty(30)dayspriorto
suchdateofmeeting.
10.13.2.
Grammar, Spelling, and Punctuation. Grammar, spelling, and
punctuation changes may be recommended by a simple majority vote of the
BusinessandLegalCommitteeandasimplemajorityvoteofExecutiveBoard.
The Executive Board may independently initiate and approve grammar,
spelling,andpunctuationwithasimplemajorityvoteandnotifythefullboard
ofthechanges.
10.14. ARTICLEXIII–GENERALCONDUCTINGOFMEETINGS
10.14.1.
Parliamentary Procedures. All meetings of the Board of Directors
and those of the standing committees shall be governed by parliamentary
procedures as outlined in Robert's Rules of Order. The chairperson for each
meeting shall designate a parliamentarian for that meeting. The Board of
Directorsandcommitteesmaymovetosuspendparliamentaryproceduresfor
portionsofameeting.
10.14.2.
Advance Notice of Meeting Agenda. The Board of Directors and
standing committee representatives shall receive the meeting agenda no less
than thirty (30) days in advance. No formal action may be taken on any item
not appearing on such advance agenda unless approved by the Board at the
meeting.
10.14.3.
PostingofMeetingMinutes.Meetingminutesshallbepostedwithin
30daysfollowingtheannualBoardofDirectors'meetingandshallbemarked
"unapproved" until such time as the Board approves the minutes when
assembled following the meeting. Upon Board approval, the 'unapproved'
notation shall be replaced with 'Approved DATE" where date shall mean the
date of Board Approval. Minutes shall be posted for each meeting for no less
than five (5) years following the meeting on the USCSA website (or other
accessible media outlet) for all Board Members, committee representatives,
coaches,andathletestoviewandreference.
147
2016-2017CompetitionandRulesManual–ApprovedJanuary12,2017
2016.v.1.4
10.15. ARTICLEXIV–EXECUTIVECOMPENSATION
10.15.1.
Executive Compensation.TheCorporationmayengagetheservices
of professional and non-elected paid administrators, to implement Board
approvedprogramsandsuperviseotherstaffandvolunteeractivities.
10.16. ARTICLEXV–COMPLIANCEWITHTHEUSCSABY-LAWS
10.16.1.
By-Law Enforcement. It shall be the obligation of the Board of
DirectorsofthiscorporationtoenforcetheBy-lawsasstatedandamended,by
anysuitablemeanstoensurecomplianceonbehalfofthemembershipofthis
Association.
10.17. (EndofUSCSAArticlesofIncorporationandBy-Laws)
148
2016-2017CompetitionandRulesManual–ApprovedJanuary12,2017
2016.v.1.4